Вы находитесь на странице: 1из 236

2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2

Operating Handbook
6.3.1992 Page I (I)

DB 2

2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

Operating Handbook

Version E0
(DY 60J221)
C33029.20

Contents

1 General Description DB200-0001-SED1

2 Functional Description DB200-0146-SEE1

3 Installation DB200-0056-SED1

4 Operation DB200-0054-SEE1

5 Operation with Service Terminal DB200-0055-SEE2

Prepared by Checked Approved Number


J. Kapanen/mlt 8.4.92 JAM 10.4.92 OR (DB200-0081-PEE1)
C33029001PE_00
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 1

DB 2

DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

General Description

C33029.21 D1

Contents

Page
1 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING 3
1.1 DB 2 equipment types 4
1.2 Various operating conditions 9
1.3 Types of branching 13
2 EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONS 16
2.1 Functions of B2 unit 17
2.2 Functions of X2 unit 20
2.3 Protected Branching Equipment DB 2P and DB 2T 23
2.4 Use of channel units in DB 2 equipment 25
2.5 Network synchronization 26
3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE 33
3.1 Structure of alarm system 33
3.2 Fault conditions 35
3.3 Actions following fault conditions 36
3.4 Settings 38
3.5 DB 2 Manager 39
3.6 Measurements 41
4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 42
4.1 Frame and multiframe structure 42
4.2 VF channels, signalling and data channels 42
4.3 Digital interfaces 42
4.4 Power supply 43
4.5 Dimensions 43
4.6 Environmental specifications 43
5 UNITS AND EQUIPPING 44

6 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTS 47 (47)

Prepared by Checked Approved Number


Ahola/Kapanen/si DB200-0001-SED1
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 2
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 3

1 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING
With the DB 2 system, the costs for transmission and multiplex equipment
in chain and tree-configured transmission systems can be reduced. By
means of the branching equipment, the channels of the 2 Mbit/s system
can be distributed along the chain, i.e. the 30-channel 2 Mbit/s frame
structure can be branched, see figure 1.
MUX DB 2 DB 2 DB 2 MUX
2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

MUX DB 2 MUX
MUX 2 Mbit/s

MUX
DB1265EA2

Figure 1 Branching of 2 Mbit/s system


The channels are through-connected at the branch point in digital forĆ
mat without disassembling the frame structure. This enables the conĆ
struction of a fully digital chain network in which consecutive A/D converĆ
sions are not used. In this way the same performance values of a channel
are attained as in a standard 2 Mbit/s PCM system.
In dedicated networks, for example, high reliability of the connections is
demanded. The branching equipment chains may be very long, in which
case the best method for achieving the required availability of the connecĆ
tions is to duplicate the transmission connection. In order for the branch
points not to unnecessarily lower the reliability produced by the costly,
duplicated transmission, the branch points can also be protected by dupliĆ
cating the branching.
In the DB 2 system, the VF common channels that are constructed in the
branching equipment in digital format are comparable to those formerly
found in analog branched systems.
In addition to voice channels, a varied selection of digital data interfaces
operating at different bit rates is available with this system. Using the DB
2 Branching Equipment, also common channels can be realized in digital
data channels thus creating the digital equivalent of VF common chanĆ
nels. The digital data channels do not require VF data modems at all.
The DM 2 Primary Multiplex Equipment and the DB 2 Branching EquipĆ
ment belong to the Nokia ND equipment generation and they replace the
DC 30, DS 30, and DB 30 products of the previous D equipment generĆ
ation.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 4

1.1 DB 2 equipment types

1.1.1 2 Mbit/s Branching Equipment DB 2B

The 2 Mbit/s signal (CCITT G.703/704/706) is connected to the equipĆ


ment from two directions (the main branch, 2 Mbit/s interfaces 1 and 2),
see figure 2. The desired 64 kbit/s channels are separated from the 2
Mbit/s signal, and a new 2 Mbit/s frame is generated for the subsidiary
branch. Possible channel-associated signalling conveyed in time slot
TS16 is usually branched in the same way as the 64 kbit/s time slots. Also
nx8 kbit/s, nx32 kbit/s and nx64 kbit/s connections can be defined for
branching.

DB 2B

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
1 2

2 Mbit/s
DB1236EA2

Figure 2 2 Mbit/s Branching Equipment DB 2B

Channels can be branched from both directions of the main branch withĆ
out limitation. The types of branching are:

- through-connection between interfaces 1 and 2


- arrangement of channels between interfaces 1 and 2
- branching in direction 1-3
- branching in direction 2-3
- VF common channels
- digital common channels.

For example, the 1-3 branching is defined as follows:

Table 1: Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


B1: 11-18 1-8

It is thus possible to change the channel locations in the frame structure in


connection with branching.

The channel dropped from direction 1 can be immediately retaken into


use in the next transmission direction (direction 2).

In all other types of branching except for in a VF common channel, the


DB 2 equipment is fully independent of the data contents and encoding.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 5

The channels" to be branched can be any nx32 kbit/s signals, so that their
locations in the G.704 frame structure are not bound to anything else but
to the halves of the time slots.

In the DB 2, exactly the same delay is produced in each 32 kbit/s section of


nx32 kbit/s channels, and therefore the branching equipment can be used
e.g. for branching a 384 kbit/s voice program channel.

The branching is defined via the service bus common to all of the transĆ
mission equipment. This activity is done using a PC provided with a DB 2
Manager software, a DB 2 Manager, or TMC Transmission Management
Computer provided with a service terminal emulator software, or by using
a portable Service Terminal. The same equipment are also used with
other transmission and multiplex equipment manufactured by Nokia.

1.1.2 Equipment of protected branching chain, DB 2P and DB 2T

The Protected Branching Equipment DB 2P and Change-over EquipĆ


ment DB 2T that are available for protection of transmission and branchĆ
ing equipment utilize a duplicated 2 Mbit/s connection.

By duplicating the units of the DB 2B equipment, the branching equipĆ


ment and the transmission paths from both directions of the main branch
of the branching equipment can be protected, see figure 3a. An unproĆ
tected 2 Mbit/s signal (G.703/G.704) is fed to the subsidiary branch in the
same way as in the DB 2B equipment.

DB 2P

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

1 2

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

3 2 Mbit/s DB1243EA2

Figure 3a Protected Branching Equipment DB 2P


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 6

1+1 Change-over Equipment DB 2T is required at the end of a proĆ


tected branching chain. 1+1 Change-over Equipment DB 2T converts
the duplicated connection to an ordinary, simple 2 Mbit/s signal, see figĆ
ure 4.

DB 2T 2M

2 Mbit/s
1 2M
RX
2 Mbit/s
2M
3 2M
2 Mbit/s
2 2M
TX

2M
DB1244EA4

Figure 3b Change-over Equipment DB 2T

The switches of the protected equipment duplicate the signal in the Tx diĆ
rection. In the Rx direction, the switch selects the signal with the better
quality.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 7

1.1.3 Equipment of loop protected network, DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD

The transmission paths can be protected also by constructing the network


of one or several loops. The protection is channel-specific and, dependĆ
ing on the transmission capacity available and the use of the connections,
concerns all or some of the channels in the system. The protection is imĆ
plemented by using channel-/channel group specific protection switches
(figure 4a) or conditional branching tables (figure 4b).

DB 2

DB1379EA1

Figure 4a Channel-/channel group specific protection switch

DB1380EA1

Figure 4b Conditional branching tables


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 8

1.1.4 Linking 2 Mbit/s primary multiplex section to DB 2 equipment

Multiplex equipment (VF channels and data interfaces) can be linked to


all DB 2 equipment, see figure 5:

- DB 2B + channel units
- DB 2P + channel units
- DB 2T + channel units.

DB 2B

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

CH CH 2M 2M

VF VF 2 Mbit/s
DB1259EB2

Figure 5 DB 2B and channel units

The integrated 2 Mbit/s interface of direction 3 in the DB 2 cannot be in


use when channel units are used. The 2 Mbit/s interfaces of direction 3 can
be implemented with a separate 2 Mbit/s G.704 channel unit (figure 5).
The unit picks the desired time slots from the external 2 Mbit/s G.704 sigĆ
nal to the internal 2 Mbit/s bus. The channel units of direction 3 share the
30(31)x64 kbit/s capacity of the internal 2 Mbit/s bus of the branching
equipment.

Those DM 2 Primary Multiplex Equipment units which completely fulfil


the DM 2/DB 2 bus standard can be used as channel units.

Unit selection includes:

- VF/E&M interface unit


- VF interface units with different types of signalling
- subscriber units (exchange end and subscriber end)
- digital data interface units 0...19.2 kbit/s
- digital data interface units 48...nx64 kbit/s.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 9

1.2 Various operating conditions

1.2.1 Unprotected branching equipment chain

Using the equipment of the previous paragraph, different tree and loop-
configured systems (see figure 6) can be constructed which, in addition to
the DB 2 equipment, are built of the following parts:

- 2 Mbit/s transmission equipment:


- cable system (symmetric or optical cable)
- digital radio relay equipment
- other such transmission systems.

- 2 Mbit/s terminal equipment:


- 2 Mbit/s primary multiplex equipment (e.g. DM 2)
- digital concentrators and exchanges for voice and data sig-
nals.

DM 2 DB 2B DB 2B DB 2B DM 2
CH
CH
... 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s ...
... ...
...... ......
CH CH

2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s

DM 2
DM 2
......
CH
......
CH
DB1242EA3

Figure 6 Unprotected branching equipment chain


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 10

1.2.2 Protected branching equipment chain

A protected branching chain requires duplicated transmission equipĆ


ment, see figure 7. The type of the transmission equipment does not
matter, and the same protected connection can use different parallel
transmission media.
A Change-over Equipment DB 2T or a partly protected Branching
Equipment DB 2P is needed at the ends of the connection where the proĆ
tected section is terminated.

DB 2T DB 2P DB 2P DB 2P DM 2
CH
CH
... 2 Mbit/s ...
... ...
2X2Mbit/s 2X2Mbit/s ...... 2X2Mbit/s
......
CH CH

2 Mbit/s
2 Mbit/s

DM 2
...... DM 2
CH ......
CH DB1245EA#

Figure 7 Protected branching equipment chain

1.2.3 Digital cross-connection for 64 kbit/s signals

A 4x2 Mbit/s digital, controllable cross-connection can be constructed


using two branching equipments, see figure 8. The 64 kbit/s channels are
connected in a desired way between the four 2 Mbit/s interfaces. VF and
data channels can also be connected to the equipment.

DB 2B
2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

CH CH CH
... 2M

VF VF VF 2 Mbit/s

CH CH CH ... 2M

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

DB 2B DB1260EB2

Figure 8 4x2 Mbit/s digital cross-connection


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 11

1.2.4 Loop protection (DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD)

In many dedicated networks, a loop configuration is utilized to protect the


channels.

......CH

2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s
DB 2

CH ... ...
... DB 2 DB 2 ...
CH

2 Mbit/s DB 2 2 Mbit/s

DB 2 = DB 2B-LP or DB 2B-CD
......
CH DB1246EA2

Figure 9 Loop network

The same equipment as described above in the case of an unprotected


chain is used in a loop network (see figure 9) but for the 2 Mbit/s signal
transfer, a closed loop is formed.

When required in a loop network, protection of the channels can be done


so that the channels are transmitted on both routes of the loop from the
branch point, see figure 10. At the receive end branch point of the channel
bunch, the better direction is selected by altering the branching.

Regarding change-over, it must be noted that the signal to be changed


over is not the entire 2 Mbit/s group; rather it is only part of the group, e.g.
the channel bunch consisting of a few channels which travels the same
route in the network. At the branch point where change-over is perĆ
formed, there may also be ordinary through-connected channels and
conventional "fixed" branchings.

The vacant signalling bit of some channel is generally used as the


change-over criterion (a so-called pilot channel). The use of the pilot
channel is based on the fact that a connection in working order is able to
properly transmit a 0-bit through the network, but any serious fault on
the frame or multiframe level converts the 0-bit into a 1-bit.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 12

1 23 1 23

DB 2
1 1
3 3
DB 2 DB 2

DB 2

2 2
DB1247EA2

Figure 10 Loop protection

The protection described above is completely based on the independent


operation of the DB 2 equipment, and the use of e.g. TMS Transmission
Management System is not required.

1.2.5 Constant-delay connection (DB 2B-CD)

When the Tx signal of the third direction is created of two Rx direction


signals, one or both of the Rx signals need to undergo a so-called frame
buffering which sets the Rx signals in phase with each other.

The buffering causes an additional delay of 0...1.25 frames


(TSn-->TSn) in the time slot to be branched. The length of the delay
depends on the phase difference between the frames to be set in phase.
Normally, the connection can be made in unbuffered mode only between
the main branch interfaces (1 and 2) of the DB 2 equipment, and thereĆ
fore the delay of the channels to be branched to direction 3 is unknown
and may also change as a consequence of fault conditions in the network.
In certain applications, however, the delay must be known to enable synĆ
chronization of various functions (main systems, paging systems).

The DB 2B-CD equipment can be used to implement a unidirectional


constant-delay connection from the master station to several slave staĆ
tions or a bidirectional constant-delay connection to one slave station.
The network can be chain shaped or it can be a loop network, which alĆ
lows also protection of the constant-delay connection.

In other respects, the operation of the DB 2B-CD equipment is similar


to that of the DB 2B-LP equipment.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 13

1.3 Types of branching

At the same branch point, any of the types of branching listed below can
be used for different channels.

1.3.1 Channel drop-and-insert

The channels can be branched to both directions (drop-and-insert), see


figure 11. If required, the time slot can be changed when transferring from
one interface to another.

The channel to be branched can be:

- 32 kbit/s = half of a time slot


- 64 kbit/s = a time slot
- nx32 kbit/s
- nx8 kbit/s.

The channels can be used to transfer any signals (bit transparency).

In conjunction with channel-associated signalling, the signalling chanĆ


nels are branched in the same way as the corresponding channel time
slots.

MUX DB2 B DB2 B DB2 B MUX


1....6 1....6 1....6 1....6
6 7....9 7....9 7....9 7....9
6
3 3
10...12 10...12 10...12 10...21
3 13...18 13...18 13...18
6
19...24 19...24 19...24
6 25...30 25...30 25...30 22...30
6 9

MUX
MUX
663366

6 3 9
DB1238EA2

Figure 11 Connections of branched system


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 14

1.3.2 VF common channel

The VF common channel can be used for:

- polling data connections


- base station systems for mobile telephones
- service telephone systems.

Summing is done for the VF signals which have been PCM coded in acĆ
cordance with the A law in digital format with complete accuracy, which
prevents attenuation and propagation delay distortions, for example,
from accumulating.

There are four types of VF common channels:

- 3-way summing (omnibus)

- unidirectional summing to different


directions.
DB1258EA1

A digital common channel is used in the signalling channels of the VF


common channel.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 15

1.3.3 Digital common channel

The digital common channel can be used:

- in digital multipoint data connections


- in the signalling channels of the VF common channels.

The bits of the different directions are combined in the digital common
channel using the following principle:

IN1 IN2 OUT


0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

The channel is thus suitable for those multipoint connections in which the
terminal equipment and data interfaces transmit 1-data when in idle
state. The DM 2/DB 2 data interface units meet this requirement, see figĆ
ure 12.

Like VF common channels, there are four types of digital common chanĆ
nels.

The transmission rate of the digital common channel can be:

- 32 kbit/s, i.e. half of a time slot


- 64 kbit/s, i.e. a time slot
- nx32 kbit/s.

DM 2 DB 2B DB 2B DB 2B DM 2
Kn

DM 2 DM 2 DM 2
+
1 2
+

+
3

DB1258EA2

Figure 12 Multipoint channel


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 16

2 EQUIPMENT FUNCTIONS

Branching Equipment DB 2B consists of two units, B2 and X2, see figure


13.

B2 unit

- 2 Mbit/s interfaces of directions 1 and 2


- equipment monitoring.

X2 unit

- 3x2 Mbit/s digital connection field


- control of connection field
- 2 Mbit/s internal bus of the multiplex equipment
- 2 Mbit/s interface of direction 3.

In the equipment, there is no need for a separate PCB for the power supĆ
ply; each PCB is provided with its own DC/DC converter. The DB 2B reĆ
quires half of a 20 T cartridge.

The battery voltage and rack alarm bus is brought to the cartridge via the
back by a flat cable.

DB 2B

2 Mbit/s 1 B2 2 2 Mbit/s

X2
3
2 Mbit/s

20T 40T

B2 X2 CH CH B2 X2 CH CH CH CH CH CH

DB1261EB2

Figure 13 DB 2B units and equipping of cartridges


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 17

2.1 Functions of B2 unit

The B2 unit consists of the following blocks, see figure 14:

- 2 Mbit/s G.703/704/706 interfaces of directions 1 and 2


- service interface (TMS/Service Terminal/Manager, V.11)
- data interface (V.11) and 4-/5-way hybrid
- generation of the internal clock of the equipment
- power supply -20 V...-72 V/ ± 5 V
- processor taking care of controlling and monitoring the entire equipĆ
ment
- phase-locked oscillator
- measurement interface.

B2

MUX DMUX G.703


G.703 G.704
G.704
2 Mbit/s DMUX MUX 2 Mbit/s

TS0
Bx 2
PAi
1 DO
V.11
MI uP DI
uP
V.11
V.11 3
MO
2M 2 MHz
Data
- ..
BAT
- +5
.. Meas
G.703
- V
CLK

CM RD1 TD1 RD2 TD2 TCK


RS1 TS1 RS2 TS2
DB1240EA2

Figure 14 Block diagram of B2 unit


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 18

2.1.1 2 Mbit/s interface block

Functions of 2 Mbit/s Rx direction

- to convert electrically the incoming signal that is compliant with


CCITT Recommendation G.703 to suitable format for the logic parts
of the equipment
- to synchronize to the frame phase and multiframe phase of the inĆ
coming signal (CCITT G.704)
- to synchronize to the CRC multiframe phase (CCITT G.706)
- to monitor error ratios of received signal
- 10E-3 (TS0 frame alignment word)
- 10E-6 (TS0/B1 CRC)
- to identify the 2 Mbit/s AIS
- to receive the far-end alarm bits TS0/B3 and F0/TS16/B6 (third-
rate low-pass filtering)
- to perform the required measures in fault conditions.

Functions of 2 Mbit/s Tx direction

- to generate an HDB3 line-coded interface signal in accordance with


CCITT Rec. G.703
- to generate the frame structure G.704 of the Tx signal and the multiĆ
frame structure of time slot TS16
- to generate a G.706 CRC multiframe for bit TS0/B1
- to transmit the far-end alarm bits TS0/B3 and F0/TS16/B6.

The cabling of the 2 Mbit/s interface is performed from the front of the
unit. The connector is either a 2x32-pin Euroconnector (120 ohm/75
ohm) or a 75 ohm SMB coaxial connector. In the Euroconnector there are
separate 2x7-pin blocks for both the 2 Mbit/s interfaces which means
that the cabling can be done with separate cables.

Monitoring is common for both 2 Mbit/s interface blocks. The function of


monitoring is to:

- assemble and analyze the fault data of the entire equipment


- analyze the parameters of availability for interfaces 1 and 2
(G.821/DB 2B, DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD)
- on the basis of fault condition data, give alarms to the rack bus
- operate with the TMS, the Service Terminal or the DB 2 Manager via
the service interface:
- polling of TMS
- handling of menus
- saving of branchings
- transmit messages conveyed through the service interface to other
units of the equipment.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 19

2.1.2 Service interface

Via the MI/MO interface in the B2 unit, the DB 2 equipment can interfaĆ
ce with the Transmission Management System (TMS). The interface
complies electrically with CCITT Recommendation V.11. Also other
telecommunications equipment manufactured by Nokia can be interĆ
faced to the same service bus.

Each set of equipment that is interfaced to the bus is provided with an


individual address. On the basis of the address, the equipment identifies
the messages directed to it, takes actions according to these messages,
and generates a response message. The equipment is controlled via the
service interface, and detailed information on the fault object and nature
of the fault is available via this interface. The contents of the menus are
provided by the object unit.

2.1.3 Data channel

The B2 unit is provided with its own data interface (DI/DO) which uses
the vacant bits B5...B8 of time slot TS0. In this way a data channel that
operates on a sampling principle can be formed. The sampling frequency
is 4, 8, or 16 kHz, depending on the number of bits used. Generally the
600...2400 Bd transmission management data is transferred via the data
channel from one station to another. Bit TS0/B8 (4 kHz, 600 Bd) is comĆ
monly used for this transfer.

The electrical specifications of the external interface are the same as


those of the service interface (V.11).

The B2 unit contains a 4-way hybrid for the data channel, where three
ports are needed for three different 2 Mbit/s interfaces and one port for
an external data interface. If required, the service interface can also be
picked to the data interface to form a 5-way hybrid.

Both the service interface and the data interface are cabled from the unit
front via a 3x7-pin Euroconnector.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 20

2.2 Functions of X2 unit

TD1 RS1 RS2 TS2


X2 TS1 RD1 RD2 TD2

CM mP Data
..
..
.. Meas
G.703
CLK

BAT
+
-5 V
DMUX G.703
G.704
MUX 2 Mbit/s

RD3 TD3
RS3 TS3
DB1241EA4

Figure 15 Block diagram of X2 unit

The X2 unit consists of the following blocks, see figure 15:

- frame aligner buffer storages for different transmission directions


- cross-connection of nx32 kbit/s (nx8 kbit/s) signals
- connection control (mP)
- PCM summing of VF common channels
- logic summing of digital common channels
- clock interfaces (input and output) G.703
- 2 Mbit/s G.703/704/706 interface (interface 3 of the equipment)
- 2 Mbit/s bus interface for channel units
- power supply -20 V...-72 V/ ± 5 V.

2.2.1 Frame buffers and connection field

The incoming 2 Mbit/s signals from the interface blocks of the B2 and X2
units are aligned before they are written into the buffer. Each transĆ
mission direction has its own buffer. The desired branching connection is
realized by means of the read controls of the buffer. The summings conĆ
cerning the common channels are performed on the defined channels beĆ
fore taking the signal to the 2 Mbit/s interface block.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 21

2.2.2 Branching control

The tables created with the DB 2 Manager can be saved as such or, when
using the Service Terminal/service terminal emulator (TMC/Manager),
each branching can be saved separately. When the table is saved with the
DB 2 Manager, the branchings are checked when the table is created.

The unit obtains the branching information from the Service Terminal/
service terminal emulator via the service interface of the unit B2 and
further through the internal control bus of the equipment in plain lanĆ
guage", in the same format as the user gave it by the Service Terminal. The
format of the branching information is automatically checked since the
data are given in a menu and only acceptable answers are accepted in
menu sessions. The contents of branching-related menus come from the
unit X2.

The unit can store several (29) encoded branchings. By an activation comĆ
mand, the branching information is first processed to a format that is
identified by the memory of the connection field and then forwarded to
the connection field memory. The connection field memory is able to
hold the eight tables that have been activated last. Changing a table does
not cause disturbances in channels whose branching information is not
changed.

The branchings stored in encoded form are saved in a non-volatile memĆ


ory (EEPROM) that does not lose its contents at power-off or when the
unit is removed from the cartridge. Typically, the memory can hold apĆ
prox. eight branching tables. Naturally, the number depends on the size of
the branching tables.

Changing of branching tables in the DB 2 can be defined conditional. The


user defines the equipment branchings in the installation phase and at the
same time the condition for selecting the branching. In a normal branchĆ
ing equipment, the branching is permanent. When a branching is condiĆ
tional", the condition under which the branching is used is also defined. It
is possible to define several conditional branchings in which case they
have a priority order.

A condition comprises an AND/OR function (selectable by the user) of 1


to 3 part conditions. The part conditions are any states of the 2 Mbit/s sigĆ
nal bits that the processor of the X2 unit can read directly from the buffer
storages of the frame aligners. The user selects the bit that is used as the
pilot channel and defines the polarity. If external ON/OFF signals are to
be used to control the branching, the controls for each branching must be
fed from the E&M interface of the multiplex equipment to the signalling
bits of the frame structure. Also the states of the TS0 bits of the 2 Mbit/s
interface or the quality of the Rx signal can be used as change-over criĆ
teria. When defining the control signals, it must be remembered that the 2
Mbit/s interface blocks insert 1-signal (AIS) to the received channels in
certain fault conditions. When the quality of the Rx signal is used as a
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 22

condition, the quality of an acceptable signal shall be better than BER-3


(fault category <4).

There is no need to realize the channel-specific protection switches by


changing branching tables, since the switches can be defined in the
branching table directly.

2.2.3 Channel-specific protection in loop network (DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD)

In a loop network, the required channel-specific protection is realized


by using the X2 unit feature of changing the connection field control.
When a branching is changed, no disturbance is caused to the non-inĆ
volved channels:

- through-connected channels
- fixed branchings.

In fact, this is a branching type of its own: a protection switch that can be
defined for chosen channels just like the other branching types.

Defining the protection switch:

- type of switch
- channels in different directions
- criterion for change-over (definition of pilot channel).

The processor of the X2 unit can monitor any bits in all three 2 Mbit/s
frames. Usually, the pilot channel is a vacant signalling bit of a protected
channel bunch. Example: pilot channel definition D3 TS18 BC refers to
signalling bit c of channel 17 (TS18) of interface 3.

The polarity of the pilot channel is yet to be defined. Usually it is: 0 = OK,
1 = not OK. In the transmit direction, the pilot channel can be reset (set to
state 0). This is done in the connection field of the X2 unit. It is possible
that the pilot channel is received in correct state already in the signal to be
duplicated (e.g. E&M bit c), in which case the signal is connected to the
protected section as such.

The bits of time slot TS0 can also be used as pilot channels. The states of
TS0 bits in the Tx direction are defined in the 2 Mbit/s interface blocks of
the B2 and X2 units.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 23

2.3 Protected Branching Equipment DB 2P and DB 2T

Protected Branching Equipment DB 2P is obtained by duplicating the B2


and X2 units of the DB 2B equipment. The DB 2P needs an entire 20 T
cartridge space. In a 40 T cartridge, four unit locations are available for
the channel units, see figure 16, and the space can be extended using DM
2 extension cartridges, if necessary.

The equipment protects the through-going channels between interfaces


1 and 2 with a very high reliability because all the sections on the
through-going signal path are duplicated.

2 Mbit/s 20T
2 Mbit/s

2 Mbit/s B2 I B2 II 2 Mbit/s

B2 X2 B2 X2
I II 40T

X2 I X2 II

2 Mbit/s B2 X2 B2 X2 CH CH CH CH

I II

DB1286EA3

Figure 16 DB 2P units and equipping of cartridges

Change-over criteria:

- all fault conditions of the Rx signal of the 2 Mbit/s interface:


- 2 Mbit/s signal is missing
- 2 Mbit/s AIS is received
- frame alignment lost
- error ratio alarms 10E-3 and 10E-6
- multiframe phase alarms
- internal faults of the equipment which affect the signals to be proĆ
tected.

The faults of the protected equipment concerning the Rx signal have been
classified into four categories (0-3). The equipment compares the fault
categories of the Rx direction and selects the Rx signal with better quality
to the output of the opposite direction.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 24

The change-over delay is adjustable between 0.1...2 s in 0.1 s steps. When


the fault is eliminated, the change-over switch is not normally reset.
When necessary, either side can be given a higher priority regarding
change-over in cases where the fault categories of the Rx signals are the
same.

The Change-over Equipment DB 2T is composed of the same parts as


the Branching Equipment DB 2B (figure 13). In the change-over equipĆ
ment, the signal of interface 1 or 2 is connected to interface 3 in its entirety
on the basis of the fault conditions of the interfaces. The change-over criĆ
teria are the same as for the DB 2P. Correspondingly, the signal of interfaĆ
ce 3 is distributed to both interface 1 and interface 2.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 25

2.4 Use of channel units in DB 2 equipment

Multiplex equipment can be mounted in place of the 2 Mbit/s interface of


direction 3 in the DB 2B, DB 2P, and DB 2T equipment, see figure 17. The
channel units of the multiplex equipment are the same type as in the DM 2
Primary Multiplex Equipment. The units must, however, completely fulfil
the DM 2/DB 2 bus standard. For instance, those VF/E&M units which
are not provided with their own power supplies (integrated or external) or
processors cannot be used in the channel unit bus of DB 2.

DB 2B / DB 2T 20T

2 Mbit/s 1 2 2 Mbit/s
B2

B2 X2 CH CH
X2 40T

CH CH

VF Data B2 X2 CH CH CH CH CH CH DB1263EB2

Figure 17 DB 2B Branching Equipment and channel units

All the channel units are connected in parallel to the bus, and they extract
from the bus the bits belonging to them in those places in the frame that
are defined at installation. The channel unit stores the settings in a nonvoĆ
latile memory (EEPROM).
The 2 Mbit/s interface integrated in the X2 unit cannot be used if channel
units are used in the equipment.
A 40 T cartridge must be used for the DB 2P. The DB 2B and DB 2T can
use 20 T cartridges when two locations for channel units are enough.

The bus structure allows the connection of different types of channels:

- VF channels with E&M interfaces


- VF channels with signalling equipment
- 0...19.2 kbit/s V.24/V.28 data interfaces
- 64 kbit/s V.11, X.21 data interfaces
- 64 kbit/s G.703 data interfaces
- nx64 kbit/s in a G.703/704 2 Mbit/s signal
- etc.

Operation of each channel unit is described in the Operating Handbook


related with the unit.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 26

2.5 Network synchronization

2.5.1 Synchronization of chain shaped networks

Since the DB 2 Branching Equipment uses frame buffers for phasing the 2
Mbit/s signals of the different transmission directions, the clocks of all the
2 Mbit/s equipment in the network must be frequency-locked to each
other. This is called network synchronization. Normally, master-slave
synchronization is used in the DB 2. The equipment at the end of the chain
is selected as a master to which the other equipment are locked, see figure
18a.

DM 2 DB 2 DB 2 DM 2

1 2 1 2

f f
3 3

DM 2 DM 2

DB1248EA2

Figure 18a Synchronization of chain shaped network

A station between the terminals of the network can also be selected as the
master. It is also possible to lock the master station clock to an external 2
MHz clock.

When the network is synchronized, there cannot be so much fading in the


frame phases that the frame buffers of the Branching Equipment DB 2
would not be able to justify it. There is a capacity of ± one frame (±256
bits) in the frame buffers.

When failures occur, the branching chain is divided into sections. In fault
conditions, the 2 MHz clocks of the DB 2 equipment are selected so that
only one clock is in use in each section of the network.

When the 2 Mbit/s coming from the master direction is cut off, the DB 2
automatically takes into use the next clock in priority order. The priority
list has three levels. The possible clock options are directions 1, 2 and 3,
and an external clock. On the last level (fourth level") there is always the
internal clock of the DB 2. The internal clock can also be defined higher in
the hierarchy, in which case the list shortens correspondingly.

Figure 18b shows the clock of direction 1 on the first level and the internal
clock on the second level. When the first direction is cut off, another DB 2
becomes the master station of the network section.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 27

DM 2 DB 2 DB 2 DM 2

1 2 1 2
f
f f
3 3

DM 2 DM 2
DB1264EB1

Figure 18b Synchronization of chain shaped network in fault condition

2.5.2 Synchronization of loop network (DB 2B-LP)

Synchronization of a loop network is based on the same idea as the synĆ


chronization of a chain shaped network described above, see figure 19a.
Naturally, the clock from one set of branching equipment must be seĆ
lected as the main clock.

In a loop network, the following two matters must be taken care of:

- The 2 Mbit/s clock shall never be connected as a closed loop.

- An attempt must be made to protect the connection to the main clock


by utilizing the other direction of the loop.

When the 2 Mbit/s signal is cut off at some point, the signal must be reĆ
placed by the AIS signal whose clock is taken from the other direction, if it
can be assured that it is not already connected to the loop somewhere else
because of a corresponding fault of the other direction, see figure 19b. In
this way, the network tolerates one fault without losing synchronization.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 28

Master

MCB, LCB=00

MCB, LCB=00
DB 2

00 00

DB 2 DB 2
00 00

DB 2
00

00
DB 2 = DB 2B-LP

DB1250ED4

Figure 19a Synchronization in loop network

Master

MCB, LCB=00

MCB, LCB=00
DB 2

01 01

DB 2 DB 2

00

DB 2
00

01 DB 2 = DB 2B-LP

DB1251EC4

Figure 19b Synchronization in loop network in fault condition


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 29

The network control bits MCB (Master Clock Bit) and LCB (Loop Clock
Bit) form an essential part of the loop network synchronization. These
control signals defined by the user (TS0 bits B4-B8) are transmitted
from the equipment selected to act as the master station of the network in
"0"-state, and from the slave stations as determined by the received state
and the fault condition of the network. The "0"-state of the MCB bit
implies that the incoming clock comes from the master station, and the
"0"-state of the LCB bit implies that there are no clock loopbacks
(=breaks) in the Rx direction. In addition to the control bits, the fault
conditions of the received signal control the timing of the slave station
(refer to Functional Description, chapters 2.4 and 2.5).

"Master"
DB 2 DB 2

DB 2

DB1277EB2

Figure 19c Synchronization in network with two or more breaks

In case there are two or more breaks in the network, the sections detached
from the master station clock are synchronized as individual sections,
until the connection to the master station is restored (figure 19c).

In order for the detached section not to get into an unstable state because
of several simultaneous or approximately simultaneous breaks, the netĆ
work must be built so that equipment interface 1 is connected to interface
2 in the far end (figure 19d).

DB 2B-LP DB 2B-LP

1 2 1 2

DB1276EA2

Figure 19d Creating a stable network


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 30

The timing mode for the slave stations of the network is usually unbufĆ
fered, i.e., the clock is connected straight through between the main
branch interfaces (1<->2). Some or all of the slave stations can also be
buffered, in which case timing for all Tx directions is obtained from the
oscillator locked to the input clock of the equipment main branch (figure
19e). In the buffered mode, the possible increase of the delay must be
taken into consideration (refer to Functional Description, chapter 3.2.1
Channel-specific delay).

1 2 1 2 1 2 2 1 2

3 3 3 3
DB1303EA2

Figure 19e Synchronization with buffered slave stations connected to


the network

2.5.3 Synchronization of a constant-delay network

A constant-delay network can be chain shaped or a loop network. In


addition to matters discussed in chapters 2.5.1 and 2.5.2, also the timing
mode of direction 3 is defined in a constant-delay network. In the other
DB 2 equipment, direction 3 is always buffered, which means that the inĆ
coming and outgoing channels are phased to the frame phase and clock
generated by the equipment. In a DB 2B-CD equipment, also direction 3
can be left unbuffered either to one or two directions. This enables a
unidirectional constant-delay connection from the master station of the
network to several slave stations (return direction not constant) or a bidiĆ
rectional constant-delay connection to one slave station.

Master
DB 2B-CD DB 2B-CD DB 2B-CD DB 2B-CD

2 1 2 1 2 2 1

3 3 3 3
DB1381EA1

Figure 20a Synchronization of a chain shaped constant-delay network

A chain shaped constant-delay network can be used e.g. in applications


where the terminal equipment of direction 3 (e.g. radio transmitters of a
paging system) are required to be synchronized with each other.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 31

Master
3

2 1

DB 2
1 2

3 DB 2 DB 2 3

2 1

DB 2

1 2
DB 2 = DB 2B-CD

3
DB1382EA1

Figure 20b Synchronization of a unidirectional constant-delay loop


network

Master
3

2 1

DB 2
1 2

3 DB 2 DB 2 3

2 1

DB 2

1 2
DB 2 = DB 2B-CD

3
DB1383EA1

Figure 20c Synchronization of a unidirectional constant-delay loop


network in fault conditions
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 32

In a loop network, the constant-delay connections can be protected by


using channel-specific protection switches. In such a case, the criterion
(pilot) for the change-over is the loop control bit LCB which also conĆ
trols the timing selection to direction 3. It must, however, be taken into
consideration that the delay in different directions is the same only if the
number of DB 2B-CD equipment is the same in both paths.

DM 2

3
Master

2 1

DB 2
1 2

3 DB 2 DB 2 3

2 1

DB 2

1 2
DB 2 = DB 2B-CD

3
DB1384EA1

Figure 20d Synchronization of a constant-delay loop network (bidir.)

In constant-delay applications, either the integrated 2 Mbit/s equipment


interface or channel units directly can be used from direction 3. An excepĆ
tion is the master station of a bidirectional connection where an inteĆ
grated interface must always be used. Also at such a slave station of a bidiĆ
rectional connection, where TU 21205.xx or TU 21215.xx units are used,
an integrated interface and the DM 2-MUX must be used.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 33

3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE


3.1 Structure of alarm system
The function of the monitoring and alarm system of transmission equipĆ
ment is to locate and indicate faulty maintenance sections.

In a fault condition or when the quality of the primary service of the equipĆ
ment is reduced under an acceptable limit, the equipment is isolated from
traffic and the service of other equipment using this equipment is inĆ
hibited. Isolation of the faulty section and service blocking are realized by
means of alarm S and the AIS signal. In the DB 2, the AIS insertions are
done in each 2 Mbit/s interface block.

The units of the DB 2 equipment are provided with three LED indicators:
red, yellow, and green. The red indicator indicates an equipment fault;
the equipment itself has discovered a malfunction. The yellow indicator
indicates a fault outside the equipment, e.g. the equipment's input signal
is the AIS. The green indicator shows that transmission management acĆ
tions are being performed on the equipment: in the B2 unit the LED indiĆ
cator is lit when a connection has been established to the equipment using
the Service Terminal, in the X2 unit the LED is lit until approx. 10 seconds
have passed from the last activity (performed by the Service Terminal or
service terminal emulator).

In the equipment, the faults are classified as urgent (A), i.e. faults that inĆ
hibit the equipment operation, and as non-urgent (B) faults, in which
case the equipment performance has weakened but its services can still be
used.

The equipment gives information on a fault condition via the alarm interĆ
faces. There are two types of interfaces: the rack alarm interface and the
service interface.

The rack alarms (A, B, D) of the various equipment are transferred from
the equipment to the power supply adapter cartridge via the rack bus.
From there the alarms can be further connected as ground or loop conĆ
tacts.

The rack alarms are:

- A urgent alarm
- B non-urgent alarm
- D reminder of alarm cancelling.

Rack alarms A and B are cancelled via the service interface of the equipĆ
ment; alarm D is obtained as a reminder of the cancelling. Filtering of the
rack alarms is settable within the range 0...15 sec. The filtering removes
short-duration alarms lasting less than 2.5 s.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 34

Detailed fault data is required for the precise location and determination
of a fault. The data is available through the service interface to which the
centralized Transmission Management System (TMS) or the Service TerĆ
minal can be connected. The service interfaces of the various equipment
are then connected to the service bus where each set of equipment has its
own address. The service bus can be chained from one station to another.
Via the service bus, also measurements can be made and control comĆ
mands given to the equipment. The service interface of the DB 2 equipĆ
ment is at the front connector of the B2 unit.

In the DB 2 equipment, the B2 unit collects all the fault data of the equipĆ
ment using the control bus between the units. The B2 unit processes the
data and transmits it to the:

- rack alarm bus


- polling coming via the service interface.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 35

3.2 Fault conditions

Fault conditions of B2 unit

1 Unit fault
2 Run diagnostic test
3 Test mode
4 Installation error
5 Forced indication
6 Forced control on
7 Incoming 2048 kbit/s missing
8 Incoming 2048 kbit/s AIS
9 Frame alignment lost
10 CRC frame alignment lost
11 Error ratio in frame alignment word 10E-3
12 Error ratio 10E-6 (CRC check)
13 Alarm from far end (B3)
14 Equipment loopback
15 Fault in Tx
16 AIS TS16
17 Multiframe alignment lost
18 Alarm from far-end signalling equipment (B6).

Faults affecting the 2 Mbit/s interface (7...18) are separately identified


from both 2 Mbit/s interfaces.

Fault conditions of X2 unit

1 Unit fault
2 Forced indication
3 Run diagnostic test
4 Sync. fault in clock recovery
5 Sync. fault
6 Installation error
7 Forced control on
8 Missing unit

In addition, the same fault conditions of the 2 Mbit/s interface as in the B2


unit are identified.

Fault conditions of channel units

The B2 unit also collects fault condition data from any channel units that
may be included in the equipment, and forwards the data via the rack
alarm bus and the service bus.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 36

3.3 Actions following fault conditions

Fault conditions Alarm Rx Rx Alarm


data sig to far
end

Unit faults:
B2 unit fault AS AIS AIS AIS
X2 unit fault AS AIS AIS AIS
Test mode AS
Installation error AS
Sync. fault in clock recovery B
Sync. fault A
Missing unit AS

2 Mbit/s alarms:
2M input signal missing AS AIS AIS B3, B6
AIS 2 Mbit/s S AIS AIS B3, B6
Frame align. lost AS AIS AIS B3, B6
CRC frame alignment lost AS AIS AIS B3, B6
Error ratio >10E-3 AS AIS AIS B3, B6
Error ratio >10E-6 B
Far-end alarm B3 S AIS
Equipment loopback AS AIS
Fault in Tx B

TS16 multiframe alarms:


AIS in time slot TS16 S AIS B6
Multiframe align. lost AS AIS B6
Far-end alarm B6 S AIS

Table 1 Fault conditions of the B2 and X2 units

The fault conditions of the B2 and X2 units of the DB 2 equipment and the
consequent actions are listed in Table 1:

- Service alarm (S) indicates that the service of the system is no longer
available.

- Alarm A indicates that the equipment performance does not fulfil


the specifications and the equipment requires immediate service
activities.

- Alarm B indicates that the system performance has weakened; howĆ


ever, the equipment is still able to transmit data.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 37

- A message is sent to the far-end multiplex equipment by converting


bit B3 in time slot TS0 from logic zero to logic one in those frames
which do not contain the frame alignment signal.
- An alarm message is sent to the far-end signalling equipment by
converting bit B6 in time slot TS16 of frame F0 to logic one.
Alarms A, B, D and S can be connected in a desired way to the PA1 and
PA2 outputs in the 3x7-pin front connector of the B2 unit. The outputs
are ON/OFF type E&M outputs.
Programming options of PA1 and PA2:
- A
- B
- D
- S
- A&S
- A+B
- A+B+S.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 38

3.4 Settings
The equipment can be controlled either locally using the Service TerĆ
minal or remotely by the Transmission Management Computer, DB 2
Manager or Service Terminal. The setting data is brought via the service
bus. The selection alternatives are presented using menus that are stored
in the DB 2 equipment memory.
The B2 unit also transmits the settings that are directed to other units of
the equipment via the equipment's internal control bus.

Settings of B2 and X2 units


- selection of the equipment operating mode
- selection of the equipment's internal clock control
- selection of the synchronization output clock
- controls of the 2048 kbit/s interface
- equipment loopbacks at the different 2 Mbit/s interfaces
- properties of the change-over switch of the change-over equipĆ
ment
- classification of alarms
- use of TS0 bits
- saving of branching definitions.

Settings of channel units


The channel units are controlled via the B2 unit. The controls include:
- equipment loopback
- time slot selection
- connection to bus (on/off)
- operating modes (e.g. bit rate of the data channels)
- VF levels.

The settings of the DB 2, as well as those of the different interface units,


are stored in the nonvolatile EEPROM storage where they are retained
also during power outages and when the unit is removed from the carĆ
tridge. The installed units compose also a back-up loop where the setĆ
tings of each unit are saved to the unit next to it as well. This makes it possĆ
ible that the settings are automatically saved to the unit replacing the one
removed from the cartridge.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 39

3.5 DB 2 Manager

DB 2 Manager is equipment management program for DB 2. The proĆ


gram can be used in an IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer (PC)
in the Microsoft Windows environment. The main function of the softĆ
ware is to facilitate making cross-connections (branching tables) inside a
node.

Cross-connections may be presented in graphics or in a text form. The


graphics mode is practical when defining the initial configuration of a netĆ
work node or making major changes in a node. The graphics mode may
also be used when getting acquainted with the capabilities of the managed
equipment.

The cross-connections are traditionally documented as cross-conĆ


nection tables. These tables can be automatically generated by choosing
the text mode and thereafter the print command. Minor changes are
sometimes easier to make in the text mode because its output is similar to
the cross-connection table.

The software provides some features that are not limited to DB 2 equipĆ
ment, but can be used with other equipment as well. The software is able
to scan the service bus addresses and to list, on the screen or paper, the
equipment found. The unit list may be fetched from any DB 2 equipment
in the network.

Unit settings may be read from and saved to any unit. This feature can be
used for back-up purposes or for copying settings from one unit to
another. The software includes also the Service Terminal Emulator,
which enables management of any equipment. Its menu-driven user inĆ
terface is similar to that of the hand-held Service Terminal.

3.5.1 DB 2 Manager System configuration

A typical DB 2 Manager System is shown in figure 21. The following comĆ


ponents are needed:

- an IBM PC/AT compatible personal computer with


Ċ 640 kB RAM (2 MB or more recommended)
Ċ a hard disk
Ċ one double-sided disk drive (for 3 1/2" diskettes or 5 1/4" 1.2
MB diskettes)
Ċ Windows-compatible graphics card (e.g. VGA or EGA) with
resolution of 640 x 348 pixels or higher
Ċ a monitor compatible with the graphics card
Ċ CCITT V.24/V.28 (EIA RS-232C) type serial port
Ċ MS-DOS 3.2 or 3.3 operating system
Ċ Microsoft Windows 3.0 or newer
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 40

Ċ optionally a Windows-compatible mouse (e.g. Microsoft bus or


serial mouse)
Ċ optionally a Windows-compatible graphics printer

- PC Interface Unit with V.24/V.28 and V.11 cables

- AC/DC Adaptor (9.0 VDC)


If the DB 2 Manager is connected to the same service bus with another
management equipment (e.g. TMC), a TMS Adaptor is needed additionĆ
ally.

PC
Laser
Printer

PC Interface Unit Power Supply


9 VDC
J1 J2
J3

Service Network

NE NE NE NE

Network Elements NEs Network Elements NEs

TS2421EA1

Figure 21 DB 2 Manager System


DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 41

3.6 Measurements
For the most part, Euroconnectors are used as the cabling connectors of
the DB 2 equipment. A measurement cable can be connected to the back
of the cabling connector. Parallel measurements are made by means of
this measurement cable.
The B2 and X2 units (see figures 14 and 15) are additionally provided with
a G.703 compliant measurement point out of which the desired 2 Mbit/s
data or clock signal of the unit in question is obtained (signals of the 2
Mbit/s interface block).
Options for the measurement interface:
- Rx 2 Mbit/s data
- Tx 2 Mbit/s data
- Rx 2 MHz clock
- Tx 2 MHz clock.

Through the service interface, the equipment can be controlled and data
obtained on fault conditions, possible transmission errors, and the results
of the tests performed by the equipment itself. By means of a test program
in the program memory of the B2 and X2 units, operation of the equipĆ
ment units can be tested using different high-speed tests.

The received signals of 2 Mbit/s interfaces 1 and 2 of the DB 2B, DB 2B-


LP and DB 2B-CD equipment undergo an analysis with regard to the
parameters of availability complying with Rec. G.821:

- total time
- available time
- errored seconds
- BER > 1E-3 seconds, etc.

It is also possible to monitor the occurrence of different kinds of error


conditions:

- errors in frame alignment word


- faulty CRC blocks
- frame alignment losses
- unit resets.

The operating voltage of units can be read directly in volts from a menu.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 42

4 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

References made to the CCITT recommendations are based on the


numbering of the blue book" of 1988.

4.1 Frame and multiframe structure

The frame and multiframe structure fulfils CCITT Recommendations


G.704/706. The TS0/B1 CRC structure has been implemented.

Basic properties

Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ± 50 ppm


Sampling rate 8 kHz
64 kbit/s PCM coding law CCITT A law
Number of bits in a time slot 8
Number of time slots in a frame 32
Number of voice and data time slots 30 (31)
Number of frames in a multiframe 16
Number of signalling bits per
voice channel 4
Multiplexing principle Sync. 32 kbit/s time slot
interleaving

4.2 VF channels, signalling, and data channels

Refer to General Description for DM 2 Primary Multiplex Equipment

4.3 Digital interfaces

2 Mbit/s interface CCITT G.703 and G.823 (jitter and fading)


Input signal attenuation 0...6 dB/1 MHz
Impedance 120 or 75 ohm

Service interface Electrically CCITT V.11

Speed asynchronous 75, 150,


300, 600, 1200, 2400,
4800 or 9600 Bd start/
stop

TS0 data interface Electrically CCITT V.11

Speed asynchronous 600, 1200


or 2400 Bd transparent
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 43

Synchronization interface (input and output) CCITT G.703

Impedance 120 ohm or 75 ohm

4.4 Power supply

Input voltage -20...-72 V DC

Power consumption (without channel units)


DB 2B 5W
DB 2P 10 W
DB 2T 5W

4.5 Dimensions

Cartridge

20 T/6 U 262 x 112 x 219 mm


40 T/6 U 262 x 232 x 219 mm

Unit (EURO-2 sized PCB)

Height 233 mm/6 U


Width 26 mm/5 T
Depth 160 mm
Weight 0.3 kg

4.6 Environmental specifications

The environmental classes of the DB 2 Branching Equipment are:

Operation class N1
Transportation class K1.

The environmental classes are described in the Environmental SpecificaĆ


tion for ND Equipment.
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 44

5 UNITS AND EQUIPPING

DB 2B, 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT


Cartridges/subracks
1a CF 24080 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 1
1b CF 24081(.01) Cartridge 40 T DB 2 1
1c CF 24084 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1d CF 24085 Cartridge 40 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1e CF 24080.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1f CF 24081.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1g CF 24084.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1h CF 24085.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1i TF 21090 Subrack 19" (EMC) 1
1j TF 21090.09 Subrack 19" (EMC), GREY 1
1k TF 21090.10 Subrack 19" 1
1l TF 21090.19 Subrack 19", GREY 1

Logic units
2a CC 24001 Branching Unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75/120 ohm 1
2b CC 24002 Branching Unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75 ohm 1
3 CS 24060 Program for B2 unit (DB 2B) 1
4a CC 24010 2 Mbit/s Switching Unit (X2) 75/120 ohm 1
4b CC 24011 2 Mbit/s Switching Unit (X2) 75 ohm 1
5 CS 24061 Program for X2 unit (DB 2B) 1

Installation accessories
6 TX 21470 Cabling connector 3x7 0...5
7 TX 21474 Cabling connector 2x32 0...2
8 TX 21475 SMB connector for RG 179 cable 0...8
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 45

DB 2P, PROTECTED 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

Cartridges/subracks
1a CF 24080 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 1
1b CF 24081(.01) Cartridge 40 T DB 2 1
1c CF 24084 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1d CF 24085 Cartridge 40 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1e CF 24080.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1f CF 24081.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1g CF 24084.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1h CF 24085.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1i TF 21090 Subrack 19" (EMC) 1
1j TF 21090.09 Subrack 19" (EMC), GREY 1
1k TF 21090.10 Subrack 19" 1
1l TF 21090.19 Subrack 19", GREY 1

Logic units
2a CC 24001 Branching unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75/120 ohm 2
2b CC 24002 Branching unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75 ohm 2
3 CS 24060.3 Program for B2 unit (DB 2P) 2
4a CC 24010 2 Mbit/s Switching Unit (X2) 75/120 ohm 2
4b CC 24011 2 Mbit/s Switching Unit (X2) 75 ohm 2
5 CS 24061.3 Program for X2 unit (DB 2P) 2

Installation accessories
6 TX 21470 Cabling connector 3x7 0...7
7 TX 21474 Cabling connector 2x32 0...3
8 TX 21475 SMB connector for RG 179 cable 0...12
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 46

DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD, 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT /


LOOP PROTECTION

Cartridges/subracks
1a CF 24080 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 1
1b CF 24081(.01) Cartridge 40 T DB 2 1
1c CF 24084 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1d CF 24085 Cartridge 40 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1e CF 24080.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1f CF 24081.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1g CF 24084.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1h CF 24085.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1i TF 21090 Subrack 19" (EMC) 1
1j TF 21090.09 Subrack 19" (EMC), GREY 1
1k TF 21090.10 Subrack 19" 1
1l TF 21090.19 Subrack 19", GREY 1

Logic units
2a CC 24001 Branching Unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75/120 ohm 1
2b CC 24002 Branching Unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75 ohm 1
3a CS 24060.1 Program for B2 unit (DB 2B-LP) 1
3b CS 24060.05 Program for B2 unit, constant delay
(DB 2B-CD) 1
4a CC 24010 2 Mb/s Switching Unit (X2) 75/120 ohm 1
4b CC 24011 2 Mb/s Switching Unit (X2) 75 ohm 1
5a CS 24061.1 Program for X2 unit (DB 2B-LP) 1
5b CS 24061.05 Program for X2 unit, constant delay
(DB 2B-CD) 1

Installation accessories
6 TX 21470 Cabling connector 3x7 0...5
7 TX 21474 Cabling connector 2x32 0...2
8 TX 21475 SMB connector for RG 179 cable 0...8
DIGITAL 2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
General Description
I
3.3.1992 Page 47

DB 2T, 2 Mbit/s CHANGE-OVER EQUIPMENT

Cartridges/subracks
1a CF 24080 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 1
1b CF 24081(.01) Cartridge 40 T DB 2 1
1c CF 24084 Cartridge 20 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1d CF 24085 Cartridge 40 T DB 2 (EMC) 1
1e CF 24080.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1f CF 24081.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 1
1g CF 24084.09 Cartridge 20 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1h CF 24085.09 Cartridge 40 T DB 2, GREY L-91 (EMC) 1
1i TF 21090 Subrack 19" (EMC) 1
1j TF 21090.09 Subrack 19" (EMC), GREY 1
1k TF 21090.10 Subrack 19" 1
1l TF 21090.19 Subrack 19", GREY 1

Logic units
2a CC 24001 Branching Unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75/120 oh 1
2b CC 24002 Branching Unit (B2) 2x2 Mb/s 75 ohm 1
3 CS 24060.2 Program for B2 unit (DB 2T) 1
4a CC 24010 2 Mb/s Switching Unit (X2) 75/120 ohm 1
4b CC 24011 2 Mb/s Switching Unit (X2) 75 ohm 1
5 CS 24061.2 Program for X2 unit (DB 2T) 1

Installation accessories
6 TX 21470 Cabling connector 3x7 0...5
7 TX 21474 Cabling connector 2x32 0...2
8 TX 21475 SMB connector for RG 179 cable 0...8

6 CUSTOMER DOCUMENTS

I General Description

II Operating Handbook

III Repair Handbook

The descriptions are available in Finnish and in English but the General
Description and the Operating Handbook can also be delivered in other
languages on separate agreement.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 1

DB 2

2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

Functional Description

Contents

Page
1 DB 2 CHARACTERISTICS 3
1.1 2 Mbit/s Branching Equipment 3
1.2 Construction and transmission management 4
1.3 Frame structure of 2 Mbit/s interfaces 8
1.4 DB 2 connection types 14
1.5 DB 2 equipment types 23
2 EQUIPMENT OPERATION 31
2.1 Blocks and their functions 31
2.2 Interfaces 33
2.3 2M Interfaces (IF) 37
2.4 Network synchronization 38
2.5 Buffering 39
2.6 Connection field 42
2.7 Alarms 43
2.8 Service Interface (MI) 46
2.9 Data Interface (DI) 47
2.10 Loopbacks 48
2.11 Reading and writing of channel signals 49
2.12 Statistics 50
2.13 Power supply and grounding 52
2.14 Bus structure 53
3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 55
3.1 Frame and multiframe structure 55
3.2 Channel characteristics in branching 55
3.3 Digital interfaces 58
3.4 Jitter and fading characteristics 63
3.5 Power supply 66
3.6 Mechanical dimensions 66
3.7 Environmental requirements 66 (66)

Prepared by Checked Approved Number


SHy/J. Kapanen/si DB200-0146-SEE1
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 2
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 3

1 DB 2 CHARACTERISTICS

1.1 2 Mbit/s Branching Equipment

The DB 2 is a digital branching equipment belonging to Nokia DYNAĆ


CARD equipment family. It comprises two units, B2 (CC 24001 or CC
24002) and X2 (CC 24010 or CC 24011).

The equipment contains three G.703/704 2 Mbit/s equipment interfaces,


two of which (interfaces 1 and 2) are in unit B2 and one (interface 3) in
unit X2, figure 1a.

The equipment interface in direction 3 can be replaced by channel units


complying with the complete DM 2 / DB 2 bus standard, see figure 1b. For
instance, those VF/E&M units which have not been provided with their
own power supplies (integrated or external) or processors cannot be used
in the channel unit bus of DB 2.

DB 2 DB 2
2 Mbit/s B2 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s B2 2 Mbit/s
1 2 1 2

X2 X2

3 3
CH CH

2 Mbit/s
1a 1b VF Data 2 Mbit/s
DB1207EB2

Figure 1 Digital Branching Equipment DB 2

By means of the branching equipment, the channels of a 2 Mbit/s system


can be allocated along the chain, i.e., the 2 Mbit/s 30-channel frame
structure can be branched, figure 2.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 4

MUX DB 2 DB 2 DB 2 MUX
2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

MUX 2 Mbit/s 2 Mbit/s

MUX MUX
2 Mbit/s
DB 2

MUX

DB1208EA2

Figure 2 Branching of 2 Mbit/s system

1.2 Construction and transmission management

Digital Branching Equipment DB 2 consists of two (DB 2B and DB 2T) or


four (DB 2P) plug-in units constructed on a EURO-2 sized PCB and
installed into TM4 equipment cartridges, refer to Operating Handbook
for TM4 Construction Practice.

Operation of the equipment is controlled via the service interface on the


front edge of unit B2 with a Service Terminal, DB 2 Manager or service
terminal emulator, see figures 3 and 5. Via this interface, equipment state
and alarm data is read, controls and settings are selected, loopbacks are
set on, branching tables are saved, etc. Refer to Operating Instructions
for Service Terminal, (DN 2/) DB 2 Manager Operating Handbook and
the description Operation with Service Terminal of each equipment.

The equipment can also be controlled using the Transmission ManageĆ


ment System TMS (refer to Transmission Management System TMS OpĆ
erating Handbook).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 5

Connection cable

B2 X2 CH CH DB1257EA2

Figure 3 Service Terminal and Digital Branching Equipment DB 2 inĆ


stalled in a cartridge of TM4 Construction Practice

Service interfaces can be connected into a bus at an equipment station


and the buses of different stations can be further connected into a service
network (figure 5) by means of the data channel (TS0 B5-B8) in the
equipment. This allows all equipment connected to the bus or network to
be remote-controlled from one point with a Service Terminal, DB 2
Manager or Transmission Management System (refer to related OperatĆ
ing Handbooks).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 6

RACK

WALL-MOUNTING SHELF

MOUNTING FRAME (INSTALLATION INTO


19" OR NOKIA M80 RACK)

DM1006EA2

Figure 4 Installation alternatives for equipment cartridges


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 7

SERVICE SERVICE
TERMINAL INTERFACES
CONNECTED CONNECTED
DIRECT INTO BUS
TO OBJECT
EQUIPMENT B
U
S

SERVICE STATION 1 STATION 2


BUSES
CONNECTED
INTO NETWORK
B B
U U
S S

DATA CONNECTION

DM1007EB1

Figure 5 Connection alternatives for Service Terminal


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 8

1.3 Frame structure of 2 Mb/s interfaces

The frame structure of the system enables demultiplexing of time-diviĆ


sion multiplexed channel signals (speech or data). On the basis of the
frame structure, the location of each channel signal is known and it can be
deduced when the connection must be disconnected e.g. due to transĆ
mission errors. The frame structure complies with CCITT RecommendaĆ
tion G.704, see figure 6.

MULTIFRAME

1 MULTIFRAME = 16 FRAMES 2 ms

Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame Frame
14 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

1 FRAME = 32 TIME SLOTS = 256 BITS (125 ms)


1 TIME SLOT = 8 BITS
(3.9 ms)

BITS BITS BITS BITS BITS

CRC FRAME MULTIFRAME FAR-END CRC FRAME FAR- DATA BITS SIGNALL- SIGNALL- SIGN AMPLITUDE
BIT ALIGNMENT ALIGNMENT MULTIFRAME BIT ALIGN- END ON ING OF ING OF MSB LSB
WORD WORD ALARM MENT ALARM NATIONAL CHAN 1 CHAN 16
WORD CONNEC-
TIONS
DM0011EA3

Figure 6 2 Mbit/s frame structure

The frame length is 125 ms and it comprises 32 time slots, numbered 0...31.
Each time slot contains eight bits. Information related to channels 1...30
is located in time slots 1...15 and 17...31.

Time slot 0 is used for internal data transfer of the system across a 2 Mbit/s
link (frame alignment word, alarms and monitoring data).

Signalling information is transferred in time slot 16.

Thus, a frame comprises 256 bits and its repetition rate is 8000 times per
second. This results in a bit rate of 2048 kbit/s for a multiplexed signal.
The HDB3 code, seen in the 2 Mbit/s equipment interface, is added to this
signal.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 9

1.3.1 Frame structure of time slot TS0

The usage of the bits in TS0 complies with CCITT Recommendation


G.704.

Table 1 shows the usage of the bits. The frame alignment word 0011011 is
inserted in places of bits 2...8 of time slot TS0 in every other frame.

<------- Time slot TS0 bit number ------->


1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Time slot TS0 CRC 0 0 1 1 0 1 1


containing the moni- <------ Frame alignment word
------>
frame alignment toring
word

Time slot TS0 CRC 1 Far- Internal data transfer


not containing moni- end of the system
the frame align- toring alarm
ment word

Table 1 Usage of time slot TS0 bits

Frame alignment strategy

Frame alignment is considered lost when three received successive frame


alignment words have been erroneous.

Frame alignment is also considered lost when time slot TS0 bit B2 has
been erroneous for three times in succession in those received frames that
do not contain the frame alignment word.

Frame alignment is considered recovered when:

- an error-free frame alignment word is received for the first time and
the state of the TS0 bit in the next frame is 1", and

- an error-free frame alignment word is received in time slot TS0 of


the following frame.

Search for the frame alignment word starts again after two frames and
one bit of the previous alignment if an erroneous bit B2 or an erroneous
frame alignment word is received at the alignment phase.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 10

1.3.2 CRC procedure

Each block (block length 2048 bits) of the transmitted signal is subject to
the Cyclic Redundancy Check (CRC) complying with CCITT RecomĆ
mendation G.704/706.

Information on the CRC result is transmitted to the far end, where the reĆ
ceiver performs a similar check and compares the result obtained to the
result transmitted. If they are consistent, the block is errorless; if they
differ, the block has at least one error.

The CRC provides additional protection against the effect of simulating


frame alignment words in frame alignment strategy and it also improves
the bit error detection capability of the equipment.

The first bit of the frame is used to transmit the CRC data. In data
transfer, a special CRC multiframe structure is used. Table 2 shows the
use of the first eight bits in a frame for the CRC multiframe generation.

Submulti- Frame Frame bits 1...8


frame number
(SMF) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
0 C1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
1 0 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8
2 C2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
I 3 0 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8
4 C3 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
5 1 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8
6 C4 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
7 0 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8

8 C1 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
9 1 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8
10 C2 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
II 11 1 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8
12 C3 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
13 E1 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8
14 C4 0 0 1 1 0 1 1
15 E2 1 A Sa4 Sa5 Sa6 Sa7 Sa8

C1-C4 = CRC checksum


E1, E2 = CRC block error data to far end; when CR C not used, fixed
permanently to "1"
Sa = Internal data transfer of system on national connections
DM0044EA3
A = Far-end alarm

Table 2 CRC multiframe


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 11

Each CRC multiframe consists of 16 frames, numbered 0...15. A multiĆ


frame for its part consists of two submultiframes SMFI and SMFII. An
SMF is a CRC block with a length of 2048 bits.

In frames containing the frame alignment word, bit 1 contains CRC bits
C1, C2, C3 and C4. In frames with no frame alignment word, bit 1 contains
a 6-bit CRC multiframe alignment word (001011) and two bits for moniĆ
toring (E-bits). By means of these two bits, information on block errors is
transmitted to the far end.

CRC multiframe alignment strategy

Supposing that frame alignment has been achieved, CRC alignment has
occurred if at least two CRC multiframe alignment words are detected
within 8 ms when the interval between two CRC multiframe alignment
words is 2 ms or its multiple. The CRC alignment word is sought only in
those TS0 time slots that do not contain the frame alignment word.

If CRC multiframe alignment is not achieved within 8 ms, it is supposed


that the case in question is alignment to a simulating frame alignment
word, and the search for a new frame alignment word is consequently
started immediately after the simulating alignment word.

Monitoring of CRC bits

When frame alignment has occurred, monitoring of the CRC bits in each
submultiframe is started.

A simulating frame alignment word is detected within 1 s with the probĆ


ability > 0.99. Then the search for a frame alignment word is restarted.

With bit error ratio 10E-3, the probability for an erroneous search
caused by CRC is less than 10E-4 within one second.

1.3.3 Multiframe structure of time slot TS16

Time slot TS16 can be used for both channel-associated and common
channel signalling. When the time slot is used for channel-associated
signalling, it forms a 64 kbit/s bus, which is divided into smaller paths
keeping the multiframe alignment word as a reference point.

The multiframe contains 16 successive frames, numbered 0...15. The mulĆ


tiframe alignment word 0000 indicates the beginning of the multiframe.
These four bits are located in bit locations 1...4 of time slot TS16 in frame
0.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 12

Frame Bits of signalling time slot TS16

B1 B2 B3 B4 B5 B6 B7 B8

F0 0 0 0 0 x y x x
F1 a1 b1 c1 d1 a16 b16 c16 d16
F2 a2 b2 c2 d2 a17 b17 c17 d17
F3 a3 b3 c3 d3 a18 b18 c18 d18
F4 a4 b4 c4 d4 a19 b19 c19 d19
F5 a5 b5 c5 d5 a20 b20 c20 d20
F6 a6 b6 c6 d6 a21 b21 c21 d21
F7 a7 b7 c7 d7 a22 b22 c22 d22
F8 a8 b8 c8 d8 a23 b23 c23 d23
F9 a9 b9 c9 d9 a24 b24 c24 d24
F10 a10 b10 c10 d10 a25 b25 c25 d25
F11 a11 b11 c11 d11 a26 b26 c26 d26
F12 a12 b12 c12 d12 a27 b27 c27 d27
F13 a13 b13 c13 d13 a28 b28 c28 d28
F14 a14 b14 c14 d14 a29 b29 c29 d29
F15 a15 b15 c15 d15 a30 b30 c30 d30

x Generally in state "1" (see chapter 1.3.5)


y Far-end alarm bit; "1" is alarm state

Table 3 Usage of bits in time slot TS16

Allocation of bits is shown in detail in table 3. This allocation provides


four 500 bit/s signalling channels, marked with letters a, b, c and d, for
each speech channel.

Multiframe alignment strategy

Multiframe alignment is considered lost when two successive erroneous


multiframe alignment words have been received.

Multiframe alignment is also considered lost when during one multiframe


only zeros are received from time slot TS16.

Multiframe alignment is considered recovered when the multiframe


alignment word has been received for the first time and time slot TS16 of
the previous frame contains at least one bit in state 1".
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 13

1.3.4 Processing of time slot TS0 bits

TS0 bits in frames containing the frame alignment word

- B1 selectable in each interface


- for CRC
- permanently 1"
- B2...B8 always frame alignment word 0011011 (CCITT)
- frame alignment word is regenerated in DB 2.

TS0 in frames containing alarm data

- B1 as above
- B2 permanently 1"
- B3 far-end alarm, 1 = active (CCITT) (3-stage filtering used in
reception)
- B4 can be used as a loop network control bit
(default setting B4=MCB)
or selectable, permanently 1" (CCITT) or 0"
- B5...B8 selectable
- data channel at different transfer rates (4-way hybrid:
interfaces 1, 2, 3 and data interface)
- B8 = 4 kbit/s
- B7+B8 = 8 kbit/s
- B5+B6+B7+B8 =16 kbit/s
- as loop network control bit (default setting B5 = LCB)
- when the bit is not used for data channel or for loop network
control, its state is selectable:
- permanently 1" (CCITT)
- permanently 0".

1.3.5 Usage of time slot F0/TS16 bits in branching when channel-associated


signalling is used

- B1...B4 multiframe alignment word 0000 (CCITT)


- B6 far-end multiframe alarm, 1 = active (CCITT)
- B5, B7, B8 can be selected permanently to 1" (CCITT) or permaĆ
nently to "0".
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 14

1.4 DB 2 connection types

Branching is defined via the service bus using either a Service Terminal, a
DB 2 Manager or a service terminal emulator (DB 2 Manager/TMC).

The DB 2 equipment can store several branchings, one of which is active.


The stored branchings are saved in a nonvolatile memory.

In branching definitions, the time slot numbering (TS1...TS31) is the


same as the 64 kbit/s channel numbering up to time slot TS15. Starting
from time slot TS17, the channel number is one number smaller than the
time slot number, e.g. TS31 = Ch 30. Branching definitions cannot affect
the usage of time slot TS0 bits.

When channel-associated signalling is used, the multiframe structure is


defined into use in the branching table (default value), in which case the
multiframe structure is set in use in all three 2 Mbit/s interfaces of the DB
2 when the table in question is active. The time slot 16 can thus be released
from channel-associated signalling, in which case its connection is deĆ
fined in the same way as that of the other time slots.

1.4.1 Empty branching table

When no branching definitions have been made, the Digital Branching


Equipment DB 2 connect the AIS pattern (11111111) to all transmitted
time slots and pattern 1111 to the signalling bits (abcd bits) of all chanĆ
nels. The TS0 frame structure and the F0/TS16 multiframe structure are
transmitted normally.

The branching connections given by the operator define a new connection


for the time slots of an empty branching table. The time slots with no deĆ
fined branching retain the connection defined in the empty table (AIS
pattern).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 15

1.4.2 Branching type Bn

In a branching of type B, the operation of the DB 2 equipment is indepenĆ


dent of data contents.

Any time slots can be defined to be connected:


- between interfaces 1 and 2 type B0
- between interfaces 1 and 3 type B1
- between interfaces 2 and 3 type B2

In connection with branching, the time slot location in the frame can be
changed between the different interfaces. The connection can be freely
defined by the operator:
- 64 kbit/s time slots and n x 64 kbit/s signal
- half of time slot, 32 kbit/s.

Example:

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


B0: 1-3 18-20
B2: 4/H 6/L

Successive 64 kbit/s signals compose a channel with a higher transfer rate


where the constituents keep their relation to time in branching.

If the multiframe structure is in use, the abcd bits of the time slots are conĆ
nected in the same way as the corresponding time slots. In the 32 kbit/s
connection, signalling bits are not connected.

Also n x 8 kbit/s connections are available to some extent when a so-


called bit mask is used.

Example:

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


B1: 3/L-1xx1 5/H
B0: 3/L-x11x 3/L

In this table, bits 1 and 4 of time slot TS3 in interface 1 are connected to
bits 5 and 8 of time slot TS5 in interface 3, whereas bits 2 and 3 of TS3 are
connected through the equipment between interfaces 1 and 2. The bit
mask is fed as "1"s and "0"s to the direction to be defined first, while the
latter direction automatically obtains the same. The time slot half (32
kbit/s) of the bits to be connected can be changed (see the example). The
bit mask is always given in 8 characters, and therefore, when dealing with
a half time slot (32 kbit/s), the first four characters are significant.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 16

1.4.3 Digital common channels

A digital common channel can be defined to any n x 32 kbit/s channel.


This digital common channel combines the data signals of different direcĆ
tions by means of a logic OR function (negative logic).

IN1 IN2 OUT

0 0 0
0 1 0
1 0 0
1 1 1

C0-type common channel:


2+3 -> 1
1+3 -> 2
1+2 -> 3

C1-type common channel:


2+3 -> 1
1 -> 2
1 -> 3

C2-type common channel:


2 -> 1
1+3 -> 2
2 -> 3

C3-type common channel:


3 -> 1
3 -> 2
1+2 -> 3

The time slot number in the frames of different interfaces does not have
to be the same.

Example:

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


C0: 1-3 1-3 6-8
C1: 9/L 9/L 1/H

In branchings of type C, the operation of the DB 2 equipment is indepenĆ


dent of data contents. The signalling bits of a time slot are handled in the
same way as the corresponding time slot. In the 32 kbit/s connection, sigĆ
nalling bits are not connected.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 17

1.4.4 Voice-frequency common channels

A common channel can be defined into any 64 kbit/s channel. In this comĆ
mon channel, a PCM code summing complying with the CCITT G.711
A-law is performed to the signals of different transmission directions.

S0-type common channel (omnibus):


2+3 --> 1
1+3 --> 2
1+2 --> 3

S1-type common channel:


2+3 --> 1
1 --> 2
1 --> 3

S2-type common channel:


2 --> 1
1+3 --> 2
2 --> 3

S3-type common channel:


3 --> 1
3 --> 2
1+2 --> 3

The time slot number in the frames of different interfaces does not have
to be the same.

Example:

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


S0: 1 1 5

The signalling bits of a voice-frequency common channel are connected


by means of a digital common channel of similar type (see chapter 1.4.3).

A voice-frequency common channel must always be terminated with a


B-type branching at the terminal points. A non-terminated channel, a
branching without an activated channel in a channel unit, and network
failures due to fault conditions (AIS) cause a DC level corresponding to
the PCM code +42 to be summed to the signal. The DC level that is
summed to the signal degrades the quality of the channel but does not disĆ
able its use if the levels of the channel units have been set to correspond to
the levels of the terminal equipment. The summing of the DC level in
fault conditions can be disabled by using conditional branching tables.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 18

1.4.5 Definition of channel bit pattern

The contents of any 32 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s time slot and its signalling bits
can be defined to be transmitted from the 2 Mbit/s interface of the DB 2
equipment (branching types D1, D2 and D3). The definition is made simĆ
ultaneously for the time slots and their signalling bits. The data pattern of
a half time slot (32 kbit/s) is given in 8 characters, of which the equipment
takes into account only the part belonging to the half selected.
The contents can be defined to be any bit pattern, e.g.:
11111111 64 kbit/s AIS
01010101 -0 PCM code
11010101 +0 PCM code
In case the signalling bits are not defined, their states will be 1111.
Example:
D2: 1-7 10000000/abcd = 1101
D3: 11-15 10101010/abcd = 1111
In the example, the pattern 10000000 (B1-B8) has been defined to be
sent to direction 2, the signalling bits are 1101 (a-d). The pattern to be
sent to direction 3 is a fixed bit pattern in time slots 11-15.

1.4.6 Channel-associated loopbacks


The contents of any 32 kbit/s or 64 kbit/s time slot and its signalling bits
can be looped back to the interface (branching types L1, L2 and L3). The
use of L-type branchings requires the buffered timing mode, to which
the equipment automatically switches whenever a table including L-type
branchings is activated.

The time slot signalling bits are looped back in the same way as the time
slot itself.
Channel-associated loopbacks are applicable e.g. in connection with
testing performed at the commissioning stage. Loopbacks of direction 3
can be used to create loopbacks between the channels of different interfaĆ
ce units. Permanent L-type loopbacks to directions 1 and 2 must not be
used in the DB 2 P equipment.

Example: L2: 2 3
L2: 4 4

The first definition establishes a connection between time slots 2 and 3 in


interface 2. The second definition connects the transmit and receive diĆ
rections of time slot TS4 in interface 2 together.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 19

1.4.7 Protection switches (Program types LP and CD)

In a loop network, the channel connection can be protected by transmitĆ


ting the signal through two different paths and providing the receiving end
with a protection switch that chooses, if possible, the transmission direcĆ
tion in order by means of a pilot channel bit. In the transmit direction, the
channel is transmitted to both directions in a loop. The pilot channel can
be defined in any time slot bit (B1...B8), signalling bit (a, b, c, d), or alarm
bit (B3/TS0, B6/TS16).

Y1-type protection switch:


1 -> 2
1 -> 3
either 2 -> 1 or 3 -> 1

Y2-type protection switch:


2 -> 1
2 -> 3
either 1 -> 2 or 3 -> 2

Y3-type protection switch:


3 -> 1
3 -> 2
either 1 -> 3 or 2 -> 3

The protection switch can be a priority switch (only one pilot channel deĆ
fined) or an equal switch.

Example 1: Equal switch

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


Y3: 2-5 6-9 6-9 Rx1
Co1: D1ă-ă TS2 - Bc - P0: +
Co2: D2 - TS6 - Bc - P0: -

In example 1, the condition for direction selection is the so-called deĆ


fault condition: the "0" state of the signalling bit c in the 1st time slot of the
direction in question. When the table is active, a + sign is displayed in the
end of the condition lines, if the condition is true at the moment, and a -
sign, if the condition is untrue. The selected direction is displayed in the
end of the time slot definition line. The direction is changed only if the
condition of the selected direction is changed to untrue while the condiĆ
tion for the other direction is in true state. The conditions of an equal proĆ
tection switch can be saved also individually, which allows the condition
bits to be selected freely.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 20

Example 2: Priority switch

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


Y1: 6 2 2 Rx2
Co2: D2 - TS2 - B7 - P0: +
Co3: D2 - TS2 - B7 - P1: -

In example 2, a so-called priority condition has been selected, in which


case the condition for selecting the different directions is the opposite
states of the same pilot bit. The direction selection follows the alterations
in the pilot bit state. The condition is given to the smaller of the two direcĆ
tions (in the example, direction 2), whereas the direction with the larger
number obtains the opposite state of the pilot bit as the condition.

1.4.8 Channel biasing for data signal (Program types LP and CD)

The desired transmit direction data/signalling bit can be biased/forced to


0/1 with M-type branching. Biasing (masking) is usually used to cover the
other branching types e.g. when setting pilot conditions to the protection
switches or to conditional branching tables. An M-type branching must
always be saved after a possible branching of another type is defined to
the time slot. Otherwise its effect is covered.

Example:

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


B1: 2 3
M1: 2 xxxxxxx0-xxxx
M3: 3 xxxxxxxx-xx0x

When the above definitions are valid, the B8 of time slot 2 is transmitted
to direction 1 in state "0"; the other bits in the time slot are defined in acĆ
cordance with branching defined separately for them. The signalling bit c
of time slot 3 in direction 3 is set to state "0" as well. The M-type is
usually used together with the Y-type to generate the pilot bit of the loop
network at the transmit station.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 21

1.4.9 Conditional branching tables

The branching table can be defined also conditional. If a conditional


branching table is activated into use, the table selected is the conditional
table with the highest priority and whose conditions give the value true".

Thus, a conditional table is provided with an individual priority (1-8)


and, at the most, three part conditions, between which various logic AND/
OR functions can be defined. Conditional tables are used when the
branching is to be changed in fault conditions of the network.

The delay in activating the new table is approximately 500 ms (default


value). The delay can be incremented up to 20 seconds in 100 ms steps.

1.4.10 Combining of tables

Table numbers 10-29 are reserved for tables to be combined. When


tables are combined, one basic table (10, 20) can be defined, which is
common to all the nine tables following it (11-19, 21-29).

When e.g. table 12 is activated, in practice the definitions of both table 10


and table 12 become valid.

This way standard parts of conditional tables can be combined to save the
limited storage capacity allocated for the branching tables.

1.4.11 Storage capacity allocated for branching tables

230 bytes have been allocated for the branching tables in the nonvolatile
EEPROM memory of the X2 unit. Different branching definitions reĆ
quire 1 to 6 bytes, depending on the type of branching, time slot numberĆ
ing and number of time slots. On an average, one definition line correĆ
sponds to four bytes. The automatic reading and saving of tables when
changing units allows only 55 bytes of branching information to be read
and saved. When it is to made sure that all information is read from the
old unit and saved to the new one, the storage capacity allocated for the
branching tables can be restricted to 113 bytes by selecting with a Service
Terminal (6,4,6). If the required branching definitions exceed this limit,
the tables can be saved to the new unit (together with other settings) using
the Read/Save settings facility provided by the Service Terminal / service
terminal emulator (Manager/TMC). The branching tables can be saved
also into the memory of the DB 2 Manager, from where they can be saved
to the equipment e.g. after the unit has been changed.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 22

1.4.12 Restrictions on the use of different types of branching

1) When common channels of S0, S1 or S2 type are used, it must be


made sure that the signalling coming from direction 3 is continuous
(refer to Operation, chapter 5).

2) When channel-associated loopbacks (L-type) are used, the comĆ


bined definitions (common channels, protection switches) for the
same time slot or half of time slot are inhibited as follows:

L1: inhibited to direction 3


L2: inhibited to direction 1
L3 inhibited to direction 2

E.g. the L1-type branching restricts the time slot selection of types
C0, C3, S0, S3 and Y3 in direction 3.

3) One branching table may contain a maximum of 16 Y-type definiĆ


tion lines. Extra lines can be saved, but only the operation defined on
the first 16 lines is controlled.

4) The M-type branching is allowed if no combined branching (comĆ


mon channels, protection switches) or a loopback has been defined
for the same time slot in the same transmission direction.

E.g. the M1-type branching is not allowed if an S1-type branching


has been defined for the same time slot; the M3-type branching is
not allowed if a Y3-type branching has been defined for the same
time slot, etc.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 23

1.5 DB 2 equipment types

1.5.1 Branching Equipment DB 2B


The DB 2B is a so-called basic branching equipment which is used in
non-redundant chain- or tree-configured transmission systems. The
equipment is provided with three 2 Mbit/s CCITT G.703/704/706 interfaĆ
ces, two of which (interfaces 1 and 2) are located in the B2-unit, and one
(interface 3) in the X2-unit, figure 7.

B2

2 Mbit/s IF1 IF2 2 Mbit/s

X2

IF3

2 Mbit/s
DB1278EA2

Figure 7 Branching Equipment DB 2B


The equipment interface 3 can be replaced with channel units complying
with the complete DM 2 / DB 2 bus standard (figure 8). In this case, the
2M interface of direction 3 is taken out of use and, simultaneously, moniĆ
toring of its faults is ended. The AIS 2M is connected to the transmit diĆ
rection; the receive direction signal is not used.
The 40 T cartridges of the DB 2 (e.g. CF 24081.01) can be chained with
corresponding DM 2 cartridges and, consequently, the number of the
units can be increased up to 20 (incl. B2 and X2 units). In such a case, it
must be taken care that the fault table concerning the entire equipment
and maintained by the B2 unit does not exceed the storage capacity alloĆ
cated for it. In the DB 2B and DB 2T equipment, the space allocated for
the channel units is 125 fault table lines in the older program versions and
200 fault table lines starting from program version 06A. Each channel
unit takes 26 (DIU2M) or 12 (others) lines of this total space. If the total
number of the channel units included in the configuration exceeds the
number mentioned, the equipment may start to malfunction and e.g. unĆ
necessary alarms can be obtained to the transmission management comĆ
puter.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 24

There are 60 fault table lines for the channel units in a DB 2P equipment.

B2

2 Mbit/s IF1 IF2 2 Mbit/s

X2

VF Data

Rx
2M-bus
Tx
DB1280EA2

Figure 8 DB 2B with channel units

1.5.2 Loop Network Branching Equipment DB 2B-LP


The DB 2B-LP branching equipment is used when the channel connecĆ
tions are to be protected by means of a loop network, figure 9. In the transĆ
mit end, the channels are sent via both paths, and in the receive end, a
suitable receive direction is selected. The selection of receive direction is
based on the pilot bit(s) generated in the transmit direction (refer to
Operation, chapter 7).
The channel connections can be protected also by means of conditional
branching tables. Also in this case, pilot bits are needed for monitoring
the network status. The C- and S-type common channels in a loop netĆ
work are protected by conditional branching tables (refer to Operation,
chapter 7).
Connection of other equipment than those intended to be used in a loop
network (DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD) to a closed loop is forbidden since
the network synchronization is lost in fault conditions of a network, and
this may even damage the equipment. In loop network branching equipĆ
ment, loop network control bits MCB and LCB are used for monitoring of
the state of the network and for controlling the synchronization. These
time slot TS0 bits (default setting: B4 = MCB and B5 = LCB) are transĆ
mitted from the master station of the network in 0-state and, as they proĆ
ceed through the network, they indicate to the slave stations whether the
clock of the Rx direction in question comes from the master station (MCB
= 0) and whether there are clock loopbacks in the Rx direction concerned
(LCB = 1).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 25

DB 2B - LP

DB 2B - LP DB 2B - LP

DB 2B - LP

pilot pilot

DB1279EA1

Figure 9 Loop-protected channel connection

A loop network (or a mesh network) retains its synchronization if the conĆ
nection to the master station is retained (MCB = 0). If there are several
faults in the network, the sections isolated from the master station are
synchronized independently. When the connection to the master station
is restored, the isolated sections are resynchronized immediately (apĆ
prox. 200 ms/equipment).

If there are no failures in the network and if the quality of the Rx signal is
adequate (fault category < 3, see table 6b), the slave station is synchronĆ
ized to the Rx clock of direction 1.

Direct timing mode

The effect of the network failures to the channel connections between the
different stations is dependent on the timing mode used on the main
branch of the slave stations, interfaces 1 and 2 (see chapter 2.5 Buffering).
When the Rx signal of the main branch of an unbuffered equipment is
faulty, the data and signalling of all channels are replaced with the AIS
signal in the opposite transmit direction of the main branch. Replacement
of the signal with the AIS in channels coming from direction 3 is cancelled
after approx. 100 ms, and the equipment has achieved synchronization
and looped the main branch clock (automatic buffering) after approx. 200
ms from the appearance of the failure. The fault results also in loss of
frame alignment and alignment to the frame phase of the buffered equipĆ
ment at all slave stations of the network. When the normal state is reĆ
stored in the network, an alignment to the unbuffered frame phase takes
place again.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 26

Buffered timing mode

When the slave stations are buffered, a failure in the network results in a
change in the synchronization only in that part of the network which is beĆ
tween the faulty section and the interface 1 of the master station equipĆ
ment. When a slave station detects a failure in the Rx signal of direction 1,
the slave station switches to the internal timing mode and sends the loop
network control bits that indicate the fault situation (MCB = 1, LCB = 0)
to the following station. The following stations keep their timing in direcĆ
tion 1, i.e. they are locked to the internal clock of the slave station until the
network control bits have been forwarded to the slave station preceding
the master station (approx. 200 ms/equipment). This station switches its
timing to direction 2 and sends the corresponding network control bit
states (MCB = 0, LCB = 0) back towards the faulty section. As the netĆ
work control bits proceed through the path, the slave stations are synĆ
chronized to the clock of direction 2, and the entire network will have
been resynchronized in approx. (2 x n-1) x 200 ms from the detection of
the failure (n = number of DB 2 equipment between the faulty section
and the master station).

Since a part of the network is synchronized to the slave station clock durĆ
ing synchronization, slips (recurrence or removal of a frame) may occur if
the network is long or if the oscillator frequency of the slave station has
been changed after the factory settings have been given.

When the fault situation is eliminated, the slave stations are synchronized
to the Rx clock of direction 1. Synchronization starts at the equipment
next to the faulty section and proceeds as the network control bits are forĆ
warded. This way the slave stations continuously retain their synchronizĆ
ation to the master station. A failure in a buffered network thus causes
disturbances only in those channels that are routed via the faulty section
and generates possible slips in channels of the resynchronized section.
There will be disturbances (= break lasting for the time of switching
delay) in channels provided with channel-specific protection switches
only if the signal selected by the switch is on the faulty section when the
failure takes place.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 27

1.5.3 Constant-Delay Branching Equipment DB 2B-CD

By using a constant-delay branching equipment, an unbuffered connecĆ


tion can be established also to transmission direction 3. An unbuffered
connection is a prerequisite for a known constant channel delay between
the different interfaces (see table 9).

The constant-delay connection can be realized either as a unidirectional


connection from the master station to several slave stations or as a bidiĆ
rectional connection to one slave station. The basic characteristics of a
DB 2B-CD branching equipment are similar to those of a loop network
branching equipment DB 2B-LP, and therefore it can be used in chain
and loop networks. In loop networks, the constant-delay connection can
be protected, in which case the unbuffered connection to direction 3 is
made either from direction 1 or direction 2. Loop network control bits
LCB are used to control the protected connection; the operation is equal.
The protected channel connection is set to depend on the timing mode by
setting the 0-states of the LCB bits (default value TS0/B5) received from
directions 1 and 2 as the conditions for the Y3-type branching. To indiĆ
cate that the branching selection depends on the timing mode, RxM is disĆ
played in the end of a Y3-type definition line in the branching table.

Example
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
Y3: 4 4 4 RxM
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B5 - P0: +
Co2: D2 - TS0 - B5 - P0: +
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 28

1.5.4 Protected Branching Equipment DB 2P

The 2 Mbit/s connection is duplicated by means of a protected branching


equipment. All parts on the path of the through-going signal are dupliĆ
cated, see figure 10. There are also separate change-over switches funcĆ
tioning independently of each other for the signals to be transmitted to
the main branch (directions 1 and 2).
The main branch is divided into two halves, I and II.
1 II
2I

B2 I B2 II

1I 2 II
DMUX MUX DMUX MUX

X2 I X2 II

DMUX

MUX

DYNACARD bus
DB1281EA2

Figure 10 DB 2P; 2 Mbit/s signals (1 -->2)


Figure 10 presents the path of the 2 Mbit/s signals, when the protected sigĆ
nal is received from direction 1 and the signal received at the B2 I unit is
selected to be transmitted.

The 2 Mbit/s equipment interface of direction 3 is in operation only at the


X2 I unit, from where the 2 Mbit/s signal received from direction 3 is
transmitted via the DYNACARD bus also to the X2 II unit. Thus, both of
the X2 units cross-connect the same received 2 Mbit/s signal of direction
3, but they do not protect each other with respect to the transmitted signal
in direction 3 except when channel units are used in direction 3.

The 2 Mbit/s signal to be transmitted to direction 3 comes from unit X2 I if


equipment I is in good order, and otherwise from unit X2 II.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 29

The channel units can be used as in the basic version DB 2B.

The switching logic can be controlled in four different ways:

- By setting the received 2 Mbit/s signals of both equipment halves to


equal (6,7,3,1). The position of the switch is toggled only if the quality
of the received signal of the selected half is worse.

- By setting the priority of the received 2 Mbit/s signals of one of the


equipment halves higher (6,7,3,2/3), in which case the signal with
higher priority is selected, if both of the received signals are of equal
quality. If the quality of one of the received signals is worse, the better
one is selected.

- By forcing the received 2 Mbit/s signal of one of the equipment


halves, in which case the position of the switch is not toggled although
the quality of the received signal would require it (time-out for conĆ
trol: 5,8).

- It is possible to toggle the position of the switch so that it will return to


its original position after the switching delay only if the 2 Mbit/s signal
of the original half is better, or if the 2 Mbit/s signals of both equipĆ
ment halves are of equal quality but the original half is provided with
higher priority (5,8).

The switching criteria are the following:

- All fault conditions of the signal received at the 2 Mbit/s interface.

- Internal faults of the equipment concerning signals to be protected.

The faults concerning the Rx signal presented in table 6b (see 2.7.1) are
classified into four categories:

- A destructive fault of 2 Mbit/s signal (categories 5 and 4)


- A serious fault of 2 Mbit/s signal (categories 3 and 2)
- A minor fault of 2 Mbit/s signal (category 1)
- 2 Mbit/s signal in good order (category 0)

Table 6b presents the faults of the 2 Mbit/s interface in further detail.

The switching delay of the switch is adjustable within the range of


50...2000 ms in 50 ms steps.

Settings selected for units B2 I and X2 I are automatically saved to units


B2 II and X2 II as well. The only exceptions from this are the equipment
address which is automatically set one number higher for equipment II
than for equipment I and the selections for synchronization output interĆ
face.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 30

1.5.5 Digital Change-Over Equipment DB 2T

The DB 2T change-over equipment is used for interconnecting the proĆ


tected and unprotected sections of the 2 Mbit/s network, see figure 11. Its
function is to select the better one of the received signals, and, on the
other hand, to duplicate the signal to be transmitted to the two inter-proĆ
tecting transmission paths.

1 2 1 2
DMUX DMUX DMUX MUX

3 3
MUX DMUX

DB1282EA1

Figure 11 DB 2T; 2 Mbit/s signals (1 or 2 -->3) and (3 -->1&2)

The switching logic, switching criteria, and switching delays are the same
as in the DB 2P equipment.

The change-over equipment operates only in buffered mode, and thereĆ


fore the Tx direction frame phase and clock are generated internally.
Branching tables are not in use in the DB 2T change-over equipment.

In the non-protected direction (direction 3), channel units can be used as


in the DB 2B equipment.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 31

2 EQUIPMENT OPERATION

2.1 Blocks and their functions

BUS

CONTROL DH J2
P1 MB
FC
BI
OSC
BI

J2 MB

PB1 PB1

J3 IF3 J3
IF1 3
1
J4 J4
CONTROL
SI
J5 J5
J6 IF2
2 DC/ DC/ J6
DC DC

J7
P3 P3
B2 X2
DB1209EA2

Figure 12 Block diagram of DB 2

IF 2M interface block

The 2M interface:
- equalizes, regenerates and converts the received line signal into digiĆ
tal format and generates the clock frequency for the received data
- synchronizes to the received signal frame alignment word and deĆ
multiplexes data and signalling buses
- monitors the fault conditions of the received signal
- realizes the alarm functions complying with CCITT recommendaĆ
tion
- multiplexes the data and signalling buses coming from the connecĆ
tion field
- generates the Tx signal frame and multiframe, inserts the required
alarm and data bits into the frame
- generates the transmitted line signal
- performs equipment loopback, if required.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 32

CONTROL Control and monitoring

The CONTROL block is controlled by a local processor and it:

- performs the settings and controls coming via the service interface
and the command bus
- controls equipment operation in fault conditions
- maintains statistics on fault conditions
- gives alarm A by means of an external +5 V auxiliary voltage, if the
equipment operating voltage is disconnected.

FC Frame synchronization and connection field


The FC block:

- synchronizes the signals of different Rx directions to the frame phase


and clock selected to the Tx direction
- realizes the time slot connections to the Tx directions in compliance
with the branching table
- compares the differences in clock phases in different directions for
monitoring the network synchronism.

SI Synchronization interface
Synchronization signal, to which the master clock of the equipment can be
locked, is brought to the equipment via the synchronization input. The
synchronization output can be used for synchronization of other equipĆ
ment.

MB Measurement interface
The Rx and Tx signals from the 2M interface and the Rx and Tx clock can
be selected to the measurement interface. The B2 has an interface for diĆ
rections 1 and 2. The X2 has an interface for direction 3.

BI Bus interface
The bus interface matches the signals between the unit and the DYNAĆ
CARD bus.

OSC Oscillator
The equipment master clock is generated in the OSC block; the master
clock can be locked to one of the Rx direction clock signals (Rx1-Rx3) or
to the synchronization input clock. It can also oscillate at the frequency set
for it without any external control.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 33

DH Data hybrid

The data hybrid switch connects/disconnects the service channel and data
channel to/from each other.

- The service channel is composed of the serial interface of the proĆ


cessor and the service interface MI connected to each other.

- The data channel is composed of the data channel interfaces of each


2M direction and the data interface DI which have been combined by
a 4-way hybrid.

DC/DC Power supply

Generates the operating voltages +5 V and -5 V required by the unit


from the central battery voltage.

2.2 Interfaces

In the units, the connectors related to the operation are located on the
unit front panel (table 4).

Equipment interfaces (3x2M) Connector

CC 24001 P3 Euroconnector
CC 24010 P3 Euroconnector
CC 24002 J3-J6 coaxial connector
CC 24011 J3-J4 coaxial connector

Table 4 Equipment interfaces (3 x 2M)

The back connector of the unit is intended for equipment power supply
and for the internal bus interface.

All front panel connectors are of male type. Locations of signals on the
connectors are shown in figures 13a and 13b. Unit cabling is shown in
more detail in section Installation.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 34

Interfaces in Euroconnector P3/X2


a c
a32 c32
RLS symm. R120 a31 c31 T120 symm. TLS
a30 c30
received asymm. R75 a29 c29 T75 asymm. trans-
a28 c28 mitted
2M RCOMM a27 c27 TCOMM 2M
a26 c26
dir. 3 ground RGND a25 c25 TGND ground dir. 3
a24 c24
RSS symm. R120 a23 c23 T120 symm. TSS
Interfaces in coaxial connector a22 c22
received asymm. R75 a21 c21 T75 asymm. trans-
X2 unit a20 c20 mitted
sync. RCOMM a19 c19 TCOMM sync.
J2 MEAS a18 c18 signal
measurement interface signal ground RGND a17 c17 TGND ground
a16 c16
J3 RLS a15 c15
received 2M a14 c14
a13 c13
J4 TLS a12 c12
transmitted 2M a11 c11
a10 c10
J5 RSS a9 c9
received sync. signal a8 c8
a7 c7
J6 TSS a6 c6
transmitted sync. signal a5 c5 MSOUT
a4 c4 TTL-level
J7 MSOUT a3 c3 measurement
measurement output a2 c2
a1 c1 MGND output
ground

Service connector P1 abc


Service interf. received A MIA a7 c7 MOA Service interf. transmitted A
Service interf. received B MIB a6 c6 MOB Service interf. transmitted B
Data interface, received A DIA a5 c5 DOA Data interface, transmitted A
Data interface, received B DIB a4 c4 DOB Data interface, transmitted B
a3 c3
Programmable alarm output PA1 a2 c2 PA2 Programmable alarm output
+5 V measurement point +5V a1 c1 PIN Programmable input
b1...7 GND

Interfaces in coaxial connector Interfaces in Euroconnector P3/B2


B2 unit a c
a32 c32
J2 MEAS RLS1 symm. R120 a31 c31 T120 symm. TLS1
a30 c30
measurement interface asymm. R75 a29 c29 T75 asymm.
received trans-
J3 RLS1 a28 c28 mitted
2M RCOMM a27 c27 TCOMM 2M
received 2M direction 1 a26 c26
dir. 1 ground RGND a25 c25 TGND ground dir. 1
J4 TLS1
a24 c24
transmitted 2M direction 1 a23 c23
J5 RLS2 a22 c22
a21 c21
received 2M direction 2 a20 c20
J6 TLS2 a19 c19
a18 c18
transmitted 2M direction 2 a17 c17
a16 c16
RLS2 symm. R120 a15 c15 T120 symm. TLS2
a14 c14
received asymm. R75 a13 c13 T75 asymm. trans-
a12 c12 mitted
2M RCOMM a11 c11 TCOMM 2M
a10 c10
dir. 2 ground RGND a9 c9 TGND ground dir. 2
a8 c8
a7 c7
a6 c6
a5 c5
a4 c4
a3 c3
a2 c2
a1 c1

DB1234EB3

Figure 13a Front connector interfaces


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 35

Power supply and bus interfaces in back connector PB1


cba

VP5 c1 a1 VP5 Supply volt. for bus transmitters


GND c2 a2 GND Ground
VN5 c3 a3 VN5
-12 Vc4 a4 -12 V
+12 Vc5 a5 REN Ring enable
Tx bus clock TCLK c6 a6 TSYN Tx bus sync. signal
Tx bus signallng TSIG c7 a7 TDAT Tx bus data signal
Rx bus clock RCLK c8 * a8 RSYN Rx bus sync. signal
Rx bus signalling RSIG c9 * a9 RDAT Rx bus data signal
Command bus to main unit CMI c10 * a10 CMO Command bus from main unit
Rx bus data channel RBCB c11 a11 TBCB Tx bus data channel
c12 * a12
c13 * a13
c14 * a14
c15 * a15 VP5T For testing (+5 V)
c16 * a16 VN5T For testing (-5 V)
UA0 c17 * a17
Unit address UA1 c18 * a18
in binary UA2 c19 a19 ALA Rack alarm A
format UA3 c20 * a20 ALB Rack alarm B
UA4 c21 * a21 ALD Rack alarm D
c22 a22 VAPS External auxiliary voltage +5 V
c23 * a23 GND Ground
TE1B c24 * a24 TE1A
TE2B c25 * a25 TE2A
c26 * a26
c27 * a27
c28 * a28
c29 * a29
VNB c30 a30 VNB Battery voltage, neg.
VPB c31 a31 VPB Battery voltage, pos.
GND c32 a32 GND Ground

* Internal signal of equipment DB1210EB1

Figure 13b Back connector interfaces

RLS Received line signal

When cabling, the sheath of the received line signal can be grounded or
left ungrounded. In addition, the required jumper settings for selecting
the impedance (75/120 ohm) must be performed in the unit. Grounding
leads via the unit ground to equipment ground (cartridge, rack).

TLS Transmitted line signal

When cabling, the sheath of the transmitted line signal is grounded. In


addition, the jumper setting for selecting the impedance (75/120 ohm) for
the interface is performed.

2.2.1 Synchronization interface

RSS Received synchronization signal

The received synchronization signal is connected in unit CC 24010 to a


Euroconnector and in unit CC 24011 to connector J5. When cabling, the
sheath of the received signal can be grounded or left ungrounded. In addiĆ
tion, the required jumper settings for selecting the impedance (75/120
ohm) must be performed in the unit. Grounding leads via the unit ground
to equipment ground.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 36

TSS Transmitted synchronization signal

In unit CC 24010 the transmitted synchronization signal is connected to a


Euroconnector and in unit CC 24011 to connector J6.

2.2.2 Measurement interface G.703 (J2)

MEAS Measurement signal

The 2M interface Rx or Tx side clock or data signals can be selected to the


connector.

2.2.3 Power supply and bus interface PB1

P Power supply interface

Through the power supply interface the unit obtains its central battery
voltage.

CB Channel bus interface

The channel bus interface includes:

- the command bus (CMI, CMO)

- unit location specific address data (UA0-UA4)

- Rx signals of the channel bus (RSYN, RCLK, RDAT and RSIG)

- Tx signals of the bus (TSYN, TCLK, TDAT and TSIG).

EB Equipment bus interface

Includes signals between units B2 and X2 of the DB 2 equipment.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 37

2.3 2M interfaces (IF)

There are three 2M interface blocks in the DB 2. The functions of the


blocks are similar to each other. Figure 14 shows the block diagram of a
2M interface block.

In the receive direction, the RLS signal is first regenerated and converted
into digital format before the DEMUX circuit. The DEMUX performs
the HDB3 decoding and locks to the frame and multiframe phases of the
Rx signal, thus generating the synchronization signal RSYN. After the
synchronization, the alarm and control bits are extracted from the Rx
frame. By means of the synchronization signal and the regenerated clock
signal RCLK, data and signalling are divided into two parallel data buses:
RDAT and RSIG.

In the transmit direction, the clock and frame synchronization signals


(BCLK and BSYN) are obtained to the MUX block from the connection
field. These signals are used to form the transmitted timing and frame.
The received data and signalling buses (TDAT and TSIG) are combined
into one transmitted data bus, into which the required alarm and control
bits are added before the HDB3 encoding. Finally, the digital signal is
converted into line signal TLS.

2M signals in 2M interfaces

DEMUX RDATn Data


Received RSIGn Signalling
2M RLSn RSYNn Synchronization
interface signal RCLKn Clock
RCDn Data channel

Equipment loopback
MUX
TDATn Data
TSIGn Signalling
Transmitted BSYNn Synchronization
2M TLSn BCLKn Clock
interface signal TCDn Data channel

m P interface
Measurement signal MDn

DB1211EA3

Figure 14 Block diagram of an IF block


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 38

2.4 Network synchronization

Network synchronization includes two factors:

- control of the master clock of the DB 2

- selection of timing for output interfaces.

Master clock

In chain and tree-configured networks, selection of the DB 2 master


clock TCK is made by means of a three-level priority list. If the highest
(first) priority synchronization source cannot be used, the synchronizĆ
ation source is selected from the next priority level, etc.

Synchronization of the DB 2B, DB 2P and DB 2T equipment is conĆ


sidered allowed from the received direction n (n = 1, 2 or 3) if the fault
category of the direction in question is < 4 (see fault tables, chapter 2.7).
Synchronization of the equipment used in loop networks (e.g. DB 2B-
LP) is allowed if the fault category is < 3.

One of the stations in the loop network is selected as the master station by
selecting Master LP as priority 1, and the actual timing sources (Rx3 CLK,
synchronization input, or internal) as the lower priorities. In addition, the
master station must be set to the buffered timing mode. The other stations
are set to operate as slave stations of the network by selecting Slave LP as
priority 1. In this situation, selection of the master clock is based on the
states of the loop network control bits (MCB and LCB) received in time
slot 0 of directions 1 and 2, as well as on the fault category of the direction
(synchronization allowed when the fault category is < 3). The timing
mode of the slave stations is normally unbuffered.

Timing of output interfaces

Selection of timing for output interfaces depends on the use of buffering.


If buffering is on, master clock TCK is selected as the Tx clock, otherwise
one of the Rx clocks of the two other directions is selected.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 39

2.5 Buffering

2.5.1 Buffering in DB 2B, DB 2B-LP and DB 2P equipment

In the DB 2, two different operating modes can be used in signal main


branch 1<-->2 for frame generation. In the unbuffered mode (see figĆ
ure 15) the received phase and clock are connected through 1-->2 (and
vice versa), whereas in the buffered mode a new transmitted frame is genĆ
erated in the connection field and the master clock of the branching
equipment is selected as the clock (see figure 16).

FAC2 RCLK1 RCLK2


RSYN1 TSYN2 RSYN1 RSYN2
RCLK1 TCLK2
F
RSYN3
F F
RCLK3 TCK FAC3

TSYN1 RSYN2
TCLK1 RCLK2 TSYN3 TCLK3
RSYN3
F RCLK3
FAC1
DB1212EB2

Figure 15 Unbuffered operation

FAC2 RCLK1 RCLK2


RSYN1 TSYN2 RSYN1 RSYN2
RCLK1
F TCLK2
F
RSYN3
F F
RCLK3 TCK FAC3

RSYN2
F TSYN3 TCLK3
TSYN1 RCLK2
RSYN3
TCLK1 F RCLK3
FAC1
DB1213EB2

Figure 16 Buffered operation


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 40

If the unbuffered mode is selected by settings, the equipment nevertheĆ


less switches to the buffered mode in some fault conditions and with some
parameter values. Table 5 shows some conditions in which the buffered
mode is switched on automatically.

Condition Direction Buffer connected

Received 2M fault category > 2 1 1 --> 2


Received 2M fault category > 2 2 2 --> 1
Equipment loopback 1 1 --> 2
Equipment loopback 2 2 --> 1
Channel-associated loopback in
activated branching table 1-3 1 --> 2 2 --> 1

Table 5 Automatic switching on of buffered mode

Use of the buffer in different transmission directions of the main branch is


independent of whether the buffer is used in the opposite direction, i.e., it
is also possible to buffer only part of the connection. The use of the bufĆ
fered mode eliminates the frame disturbances advancing in the network
but, on the other hand, it may lengthen the propagation delay (see table
9).

In direction 3, the signal is always connected in buffered mode in phase


with the equipment master clock.

2.5.2 Buffering in DB 2B-CD equipment

In addition to the timing alternatives mentioned in the preceding chapter,


the DB 2B-CD equipment offers also so-called special functions which
make it possible that the unbuffered mode is available also in direction 3.
The unbuffered mode is a prerequisite for a known channel delay beĆ
tween two interfaces (see table 9), and therefore, when a constant chanĆ
nel delay is to be set between two nodes in the transmission network, all
sections between the ports used by the signals in the DB 2 equipment on
the signal path must be unbuffered. When the frame is generated for a
certain Tx direction, it can be provided with an unbuffered connection
from only one of the remaining two directions.

Unidirectional constant-delay connection

When a unidirectional constant-delay connection is established from


the master station of the network to one or more slave stations, an unbufĆ
fered connection from direction 3 is selected to both the direction 1 and
the direction 2 at the master station; the other connections are buffered.
At the slave stations, an unbuffered connection from direction 1 or 2 to
direction 3 is selected either as a permanent connection or as controlled
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 41

by the network control bit LCB. The main branch of the slave station
(1<->2) is also unbuffered, as are also the main branches of any interĆ
mediate stations that may be used.

Bidirectional constant-delay connection

In a bidirectional constant-delay connection between the master station


and one slave station, the same timing mode is selected at both stations.
The connection is unbuffered from direction 3 both to direction 1 and to
direction 2 and from direction 1 or direction 2 to direction 3. The timing
mode selection to direction 3 is equal and controlled by the network conĆ
trol bit LCB.

A prerequisite to the unbuffered connection in direction 3 is that the fault


category of the signal from direction 3 is < 3. In addition, the equipment
must be synchronized to the clock from direction 1 or from direction 2 in
order to retain the synchronization in the loop network. In other respects,
the preconditions of an unbuffered connection from the certain direction
are the same as those mentioned in chapter 2.5.1: fault category < 3, no
equipment loopback, no channel-associated loopbacks.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 42

2.6 Connection field

The connection field has a separate frame alignment circuit for each
transmit direction. In these circuits the connections defined in the
branching table are performed to the transmitted signal. Figure 17 shows
the connection field block diagram on the signal routes in the connection
point.

Each frame alignment circuit aligns the received signals to the Tx clock
and frame phase and connects the channel coming from the selected Rx
direction to the output, performs a logic AND function to two received
channels, sums at voice frequency two received channels into one transĆ
mitted channel, or loops the channel from Rx direction back to the outĆ
put.

TDAT2
RDAT1 FAC2 TSIG2
RSIG1 TSYN2
RSYN1 SUM TCLK2
RCLK1
&
F

RDAT2
RSIG2
F SUM
RSYN2
RCLK2
TDAT1 TCK
TSIG1 &
TSYN
TSYN1
TCLK1 FAC1 F
SUM
&

FAC3

TDAT3
TSIG3
TSYN3
TCLK3

RDAT3
RSIG3
RSYN3 DB1214EA2
RCLK3

Figure 17 Frame alignment


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 43

2.7 Alarms

The equipment monitors the functions of both units and gives alarms on
fault conditions occurring in them. It also monitors the received fault
conditions of each 2M interface and activates the required alarms. In
addition, the alarms of any channel units that may be included in the conĆ
figuration are transferred via the B2 unit.

2.7.1 2M faults

There are altogether twelve 2M faults to be monitored in each interface.


Table 6b shows the fault category of each fault, the corresponding rack
alarm, the state of the unit LED and consequences on data and signalling
bits, as well as the state of far-end alarm bits at the output of the interface
in question. Some of the faults can be provided with different conseĆ
quences (e.g. BER-3), the consequences corresponding to the default
settings highest in the hierarchy.

The fault display has a separate monitoring block for faults of each 2M
interface.

DB 2 monitoring
block DB 2T
Block no DB 2B(-LP, -CD) DB 2P

0 Faults of B2 unit Faults of B2 I


1 Faults of interface 1 Interface 1 I
2 Faults of interface 2 Interface 2 I
3 Faults of interface 3 Interface 3
4 Faults of X2 unit Faults of X2 I
5 Faults of channel unit 1 Faults of B2 II
6 Faults of channel unit 2 Interface 1 II
7 Faults of channel unit 3 Interface 2 II
8 Faults of channel unit 4 Faults of X2 II
9 Faults of channel unit 5 Faults of channel unit 1
etc. etc.

Table 6a DB 2 monitoring blocks


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 44

Fault
code Fault Fault Rack LED Rx Rx Tx Tx TX
(HEX.) category alarm data sig B3 B6 AIS

32H 2M missing 5 AS yel AIS AIS 1 1


42H 2M AIS 4 S yel AIS AIS 1 1
42H 2M AIS 4 BS yel AIS AIS 1 1
51H Loss of frame alignment 4 AS yel AIS AIS 1 1
56H CRC multifr. align. lost 4 AS yel AIS AIS 1 1
16H Loop to equipment 4 AS yel 1 1 AIS
63H BER-3 4 AS yel AIS AIS 1 1
63H BER-3 2 A yel 0 0
63H BER-3 2 B yel 0 0
0 BER-3 0 - - 0 0
B3H FEA (=TS0/B3) 3 S yel AIS 0 0
B3H FEA (=TS0/B3) 3 BS yel AIS 0 0
B3H FEA (=TS0/B3) 3 AS yel AIS 0 0
4AH TS16 AIS 2 AS yel AIS 0 1
52H MF missing 2 AS yel AIS 0 1
B2H TS16/F0/B6 2 S yel AIS 0 0
66H BER-6 1 B yel 0 0
99H Fault in Tx 0 B yel 0 0
0 OK 0 - - 0 0

Table 6b 2M faults
The 'Fault in Tx' alarm can be selected to be given in a situation, where,
after the connection field, 4 zeros are found in bits a-d in one of channels
1-15 of the outgoing signalling channel. When the alarm selection is acĆ
tive, the bits of the channel concerned are forced into state 0001 before
transmission. The default setting is forced control without any alarm.
Also enabling of signalling state abcd = 0000 on channels 1-15 can be
selected (ADPCM usage).

2.7.2 Unit faults


Table 7 shows the faults monitored by the B2 unit which concern the enĆ
tire branching equipment. These faults compose their own monitoring
block in the fault display.

Fault code Fault Rack LED Tx Tx TX


(HEX) alarm B3 B6 AIS
96H Equipment reset AS red 1 1 AIS
8EH Fault in installation AS red
95H Forced indication B red/yel/-
9FH Run diagnostic test A red/yel/-
8DH Forced control B yel
17H Test mode AS red

Table 7 Unit faults of unit B2


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 45

Table 8 shows the equipment-level faults monitored by unit X2. These


faults compose their own monitoring block. Before the equipment main
unit B2 gives the X2 unit the permission to start up, the unit gives only the
Fault in installation alarm and indicates it by the red LED.

Fault code Fault Rack LED Tx Tx TX


(HEX) alarm B3 B6 AIS

96H Equipment reset AS red 1 1 AIS


7AH Synchronization fault A yel
7CH Sync. fault in clock recovery B yel
8EH Fault in installation AS -
95H Forced indication B red/yel/-
8DH Forced control B yel
9FH Run diagnostic test A/B red/yel/-
17H Test mode AS red
8BH Missing unit AS -

Table 8 Unit faults of unit X2

A fault message may be caused by:

Equipment reset: unit has been reset (e.g. when switching the
power on)
Fault in installation: wrong unit location (unit address)
Forced indication: forced control of service LEDs set on
Run diagnostic test: indicates a fault on which further informaĆ
tion is obtained by selection 9,7 (B2) or
9,9,2,7 (X2), e.g. table fault
Forced control: a control provided with time-out is set on
Test mode: EPROM or EEPROM test running
Synchronization fault: signal to synchronization output disconĆ
nected due to fault in the source Rx signal
(fault category > 3)
Synchronization fault a synchronization input clock signal which
in clock recovery: is provided with a priority on the synchronĆ
ization list is missing
Missing unit: B2 unit lost connection to X2 unit or to
channel unit
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 46

2.7.3 Service LEDs

red There is a serious fault in the unit or the unit is not included in
the equipment configuration.

yellow The fault is in the signal received by the unit,


the fault restricts the use of the unit or a control has been
activated in the unit.

green The unit is accessed by Service Terminal or service


terminal emulator.

If the unit operating voltages are disconnected (power failure) the exterĆ
nal auxiliary voltage connected to the unit activates the red service LED.

2.8 Service interface (MI)

Via the service interface on the front edge of DB 2 / B2 unit, the processor
is connected to the service bus by means of a serial interface. Via the serĆ
vice bus the equipment can be controlled either locally or remote-conĆ
trolled by means of a Service Terminal, service terminal emulator, DB 2
Manager or Transmission Management Computer. Messages to other
units of the equipment are conveyed by unit B2 via the internal command
bus.

Each equipment connected to the bus has its own address. On the basis of
the address, the equipment identifies the messages directed to it, perĆ
forms the required functions and if required, generates a response messĆ
age.

The service interface can be connected to the data channel via the data
hybrid by giving the data hybrid activation command (6,1,8).

In the DB 2P, the Transmission Management Computer or a Service TerĆ


minal is connected to the B2 in unit location 1. The B2 of location 3 serves
as a slave through the command bus, and consequently does not have to
be connected separately to the transmission management system.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 47

2.9 Data interface (DI)


The data interface is one of the data channel interface points. The other
are the data channel interfaces formed by free bits B5-B8 in time slot
TS0 of each of the 2M directions. The data channel operates on sampling
principle at 4, 8 or 16 kHz, depending on the number of bits used. The sigĆ
nals coming from other interfaces are summed by digital AND function to
the output of the interface to be monitored. The usage and the sampling
rate are set individually for each 2M data channel interface. From direcĆ
tion 3 the data channel can be interfaced also by DIU2M units.

Data hybrid

Figure 18 shows the logic connection of both the service channel and the
data channel. If required, these two channels can be combined, in which
case the service interface output is always active and operates then like
the DI interface.

MI & mP

DH on/off
control

--

DI

TS0 TS0
control control
2M/1 CD1
& CD2 2M/2

B2

CD3 X2
(or n x DIU2M)
TS0
control
2M/3
DB1215EB2

Figure 18 Data hybrid

The data hybrid is always switched off when the PIN signal (pin c1) is
grounded at the service interface. This allows the units to be monitored
locally in fault situations with the Service Terminal.

2.10 Loopbacks
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 48

An equipment loopback can be performed in the unit with regard to the


2M equipment interface (see figure 19a). The loopbacks are set on via the
service interface. To ensure that the loopbacks do not remain valid by misĆ
take, they are released automatically when the time period set for the conĆ
trols has elapsed (default setting 10 min).

DEMUX Rx

G.703
2M MUX Tx

2M AIS
DB1283EA2

Figure 19a Equipment loopback

Also channel-associated loopbacks to the 2M direction can be set on in


the unit. With these loopbacks, the connections are performed by settings
in a branching table and are thus not time-controlled. A channel-assoĆ
ciated loopback always causes the equipment to switch into the buffered
mode.

No channel-associated loopback must be defined in an active table at a


slave station of the loop network, if the branching equipment is to operate
in the unbuffered mode. Connection of channel-associated loopbacks is
shown in figure 19b.

FAC2

RDAT1 TDAT2

F RDAT2
F
TDAT1

FAC1

FAC3

TDAT3

RDAT3 DB1216EA2

Figure 19b Channel-associated loopbacks


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 49

2.11 Reading and writing of channel signals

The DB 2 equipment provides a possibility to test the channels via the serĆ
vice interface of the main unit. A bit pattern can be written into the transĆ
mitted 2048 kbit/s signal or into a channel time slot of the signal going to
the connection field. Similarly, the current contents can be read from a
2048 kbit/s signal coming from any time slot or from the connection field.
When data is written into a time slot, it replaces the normal signal. ReadĆ
ing a time slot does not disturb the normal operation.

Similar reading and writing facilities are offered for the signalling data by
the DB 2 equipment. It is possible to read the signalling data of a specific
channel either from the received or the transmitted signal by the Service
Terminal. The Service Terminal can also be used for replacing the signal
transmitted by the channel unit by a test signal either in time slot 16 of the
transmitted signal (data conveyed to the far end) or the replacement can
be performed for the signalling information going to the channel unit
(near-end data).

In both cases, the writing facility is provided with a time-out and the writĆ
ing is deactivated when the time defined for the controls has elapsed. The
writing is also stopped when writing to another channel in the same direcĆ
tion is activated or if the unit is reset. Also selections Stop writing and DB
2 to normal state cause the writing to be stopped.

The reading and writing facilities are not applicable to direction 3 in a DB


2B-CD equipment, nor can they be used when the 2M interface has been
taken out of use ( = when channel units are used).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 50

2.12 Statistics

The statistics include statistics and error counter information maintained


by the equipment and concerning the operation of the equipment.

2.12.1 2M signal quality

The quality of the 2M signal is monitored in the DB 2 equipment by obĆ


serving the errors detected in the frame alignment word and in the CRC
blocks. The statistics is implemented for interfaces 1 and 2 in the DB 2B,
DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD equipment.

The format of the responses seen on the display is based on the CCITT
Recommendation G.821 concerning signal quality. According to the recĆ
ommendation, the total time (S(tot)) must be divided into availability
time and unavailability time (S(unav)). The availability time is further diĆ
vided into severely errored seconds (S(sev)), errored seconds (S(err))
and degraded minutes (M(degr)) as follows:

The connection is unavailable when the signal contains ten consecuĆ


tive seconds with an error ratio worse than 10-3. The seconds in
question belong to the unavailability time (S(unav)). The availability
time begins again from the beginning of ten consecutive seconds with
an error ratio better than 10-3. The unavailability time also includes
various severe failures, e.g. a missing signal or loss of frame alignĆ
ment, if their duration exceeds 10 seconds.

Errored seconds are seconds including one or several errors.

Severely errored seconds are seconds in the availability time with an error
ratio worse than 10-3.

Degraded minutes are sequences of 60 seconds with the mean error ratio
worse than 10-6.

Errored seconds

The CCITT Recommendations give maximum values for ratios concernĆ


ing signal quality. The values have been measured for the 64 kbit/s signal
with a certain connection type. Higher transmission rates are provided
with recommendation drafts which presuppose that the transmission
ratio is taken into consideration when computing the errored seconds.
When computing errors in the 2048 kbit/s signal, if the number of errors in
a second is smaller than 32, the number of errors is divided by 32 and the
number obtained is considered as the value for an errorless 64 kbit/s sigĆ
nal in each second. If the number of errors is 32 or greater, the second in
question is considered errored (count value = 1) also in the 64 kbit/s sigĆ
nal.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 51

When measuring errors in the frame alignment word, if an error is deĆ


tected in the frame alignment word in the time of one second, the second
in question is considered errored also as concerns the 64 kbit/s signal.

Number of errors of the error ratio

If, in the time of one second, more than 28 erroneous frame alignment
words are detected (BER = 10-3), the second concerned is considered
severely errored. If, in the time of one minute, at least 2 errors are deĆ
tected in the frame alignment word (BER = 1.12 x 10-6) or if at least 123
CRC block errors (BER = 1.00 x 10-6) are found, the minute is conĆ
sidered degraded (if CRC is in use, it is utilized in identifying the deĆ
graded minute).

Statistics display

The menus obtained from the Service Terminal display the statistics conĆ
cerning the availability of the equipment. The statistics are based on comĆ
puting the error ratio:
Ċ total time
Ċ availability time
Ċ errored seconds
Ċ BER > 10-3 seconds
Ċ degraded minutes
Ċ S(unav)/S(tot)
Ċ S(err)/S(ava)
Ċ S(sev)/S(ava)
Ċ M(degr)/M(ava)

The total time and the availability time are indicated in seconds.
S(unav)/S(tot) indicates the ratio of the unavailability time to total time.
S(err)/S(ava) indicates the ratio of errored seconds to the availability
time.
S(sev)/S(ava) indicates the ratio of severely errored seconds to the availĆ
ability time.
M(degr)/M(ava) indicates the ratio of degraded minutes to the availabilĆ
ity time.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 52

2.12.2 Error counters

The error counters contain occurrences of various fault conditions deĆ


tected in the operation of the equipment:
Ċ number of frame alignment losses
Ċ number of erroneous frame alignment words
Ċ number of CRC block errors
Ċ number of DB 2 equipment processor resets.

2.13 Power supply and grounding

The DB 2 equipment uses decentralized PCB-specific power supply.


The units generate their required operating voltages +5 V and -5 V from
the central battery voltage -20...-72 VDC obtained from the Power
Supply Adapter (PSA) via the rack bus.

The unit ground is connected via the motherboard to the body of the
equipment cartridge (CF 24080/20T or CF 24081/40T) and from there
further to the rack ground. When it is desired to separate the unit ground
from the rack ground, cartridges CF 24080.8 or CF 24081.8 are used.

A more detailed description of the power supply is given in the General


Description of TM4 Construction Practice.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 53

2.14 Bus structure

The interfaces between the DB 2 equipment and the channel units are
realized by means of a time-division multiplexed bus structure. ConnecĆ
tion of the DB 2 equipment to the bus takes place via unit X2 (see figure
20).

2M 2M
B2
G.703 G.703

CMO
CMI
CMO
Channel CMI
User
unit
interface
1 CMO
VF+SIG CMI
X2
or
DATA

CMO
Channel
unit CMI
Rx bus

Tx bus

N
Control bus

N = 2...30 DB1217EA2

Figure 20 Bus structure of DM 2 / DB 2 Channel units

The bus operates at the bit rate of 2 Mbit/s. Information is transferred on


the bus by means of a frame having 32 time slots with 8 bits in each, altoĆ
gether 256 bits.

Structurally, the frame is similar to the 2 Mbit/s multiplex equipment


frame (CCITT G.704). However, multiframe structure is not used in inĆ
ternal transfer, instead, there is a separate bus for channel-associated
signalling operating in phase with the speech and data bus.

For each channel there are 8 bits in the bus to be used in signalling transfer
(64 kbit/s). Four of these are used for the transfer of signalling bits a, b, c
and d.

The transmit and receive directions have their own buses, Tx bus and Rx
bus. The bus operation is controlled by clock and synchronization signals,
which are identical in Tx and Rx directions.

Information related to channels 1...30 is located in time slots 1..15 and


17...31.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 54

2.14.1 Tx bus signals

TSYN Combined transmit direction frame/multiframe syn-


chronization signal 8 kHz/500 Hz

TCLK Transmit direction clock 2048 kHz

TDAT Transmit direction speech and data signal

TSIG Transmit direction signalling

2.14.2 Rx bus signals

RSYN Combined receive direction frame/multiframe synchroniza-


tion signal 8 kHz/500 Hz

RCLK Receive direction clock 2048 kHz

RDAT Receive direction speech and data signal

RSIG Receive direction signalling

2.14.3 Control bus

For the channel control, the equipment has a separate asynchronous


serial bus (CMO, CMI). Through this bus, information is transferred
from one unit to another with a transfer rate of approx. 20 kbit/s. The bus
is a data transfer bus between the microprocessors in the units.

Unit B2 is the master unit of the bus, whereas unit X2 and the channel
units are slaves. Unit B2 can shift the master status temporarily to some
other unit.

Data transfer is performed asynchronously in 11-bit frames starting with


a start bit and ending with a stop bit. In the beginning of each message
there is an address frame, the information field of which contains the
5-bit unit address. Each unit has its own address (A0...A4) based on its
location. By means of this address, the unit identifies the messages diĆ
rected to it.

Address 63 is reserved as a common address for all units. This address is


used by unit B2 when it wants to direct commands to all units simultaĆ
neously.

Unit B2 II in unit location 3 of the DB 2P serves as a slave.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 55

3 TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
3.1 Frame and multiframe structure
The frame/multiframe structure complies with CCITT Recommendation
G.704/706.
Basic characteristics
Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm
Sampling rate 8 kHz
PCM coding law CCITT A-law
(VF common channels)
Time slots in a frame 32
Speech & data time slots 30 (31)
Bits in a time slot 8
Frames in a multiframe 16
Signalling bits/speech channel 4
Multiplex principle Time slot interleaving

3.2 Channel characteristics in branching


The following lists the characteristics affected by the DB 2 equipment.
When performance values for the equipment including channel units are
desired, these values are to be added to the values given in the descripĆ
tions of each channel unit.

3.2.1 Channel-specific delay

Buffered mode Unbuffered mode

In speech time slots


- without TSI 12-165 ms 12 ms
- with TSI 130-380 ms 260 ms*
Signalling bit
- without TSI 160-2600 ms 160-2600 ms
- with TSI 160-2600 ms 160-2600 ms*
TSI = time slot interchanging
* = delay when Tx TS = Rx TS - 1,
Formulas:
Unbuffered TSn -> TSm; 12 + 2 x 125 + (m-n) x 3.9
Buffered TSn -> TSn; 12 + (0...1.25) x 125
Buffered TSnĂ->ĂTSm; 12Ă+Ă(1...3)ĂxĂ125Ă+Ă(m-n)Ăx 3.9

Table 9 Channel delays


The increased delay due to time slot interchanging shall be taken into
consideration e.g. when planning n x 64 kbit/s connections.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 56

3.2.2 Switching delay of channel-associated protection switches


(type Y branching)

The switching time of a channel-associated protection switch is approx.


200-400 ms depending on the number of type Y branchings in an active
table: 16 definition lines (= max), 30 time slots = 400 ms. If the X2 unit is
being accessed via the service interface when the condition bit changes,
the switching time may be increased by up to 200 ms (e.g. sizeable disĆ
plays).

If a Y-type branching is used in a conditional branching table, the delay


caused by changing the table is summed to the switching time.

3.2.3 Switching delay of conditional branching tables

The switching delay of conditional branching tables is settable to 0.5...20


seconds in 0.1 second steps. When a conditional table is changed, no erĆ
rors are caused to those branchings that remain unchanged.

3.2.4 VF common channel characteristics

Delay

As in speech time slots in chapter 3.2.1.

Idle channel noise

Idle channel noise is the sum of the summed basic noises of channels.

Intermodulation

When two digital sine signals which are not in harmonic relation to each
other and whose level is the same varying within the range -4...-21
dBm0 are simultaneously fed into the sum channel, they do not produce
an intermodulation result of type 2f1-f2, the level of which would exceed
-45 dB compared to one input signal level.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 57

Quantization noise in summing

S/N S

ÉÉ
50 ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
40
36 dB

30 ÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
É
É -1 dBm0

É
É
-60 -50 -40 É
-30 -20 -10 0
S
dBm0
DB1256EA1

Figure 21 Mask figure for signal quantization noise ratio of one adder
with sine signals of the same value
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 58

3.3 Digital interfaces

3.3.1 2048 kbit/s equipment interfaces (interfaces 1, 2, and 3)

The interface complies with CCITT Recommendation G.703.

Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm


Code HDB3

Transmitter characteristics

Pulse shape see figure 22


Peak voltage 2.37 V/75 ohms and 3.0 V/120 ohms
No-pulse height 0.237 V/75 ohms and 0.3 V/120 ohms
Pulse width 244 ns ±20 ns
Amplitude ratio between
positive and
negative pulses 0.95...1.05
Width ratio between
positive and negative
pulses 0.95...1.05
Output jitter see chapter 3.4

Receiver parameters

Attenuation at 1 MHz < 6 dB


Impedance 75 ohms or 120 ohms
Return loss > 12 dB/50...100 kHz
> 18 dB/0.1...2.1 MHz
> 14 dB/2.1...3.1 MHz
Allowed input jitter see chapter 3.4
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 59

3.3.2 Synchronization interface 2048 kHz

The interface complies with CCITT Recommendation G.703.

Synchronization output

Pulse shape see figure 23


Frequency 2048 kHz ±50 ppm
Impedance 75/120 ohms
Amplitude 2...3.8 Vpp/120 ohms
1.5...3.0 Vpp/75 ohms.

Synchronization input

Frequency 2048 kHz ±50 ppm


Impedance 75/120 ohms
Amplitude 2...3.8 Vpp / 120 ohms
1.5...3.0 Vpp / 75 ohms
Allowed attenuation 0...6 dB
Return loss > 15 dB / 2048 kHz.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 60

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
269 ns
(244 + 25)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
20%
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
10%
V = 100 %
10%
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 194 ns

20%
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
(244-50)

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Nominal
pulse

ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
50 %
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
244 ns

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
219 ns
(244 - 25)

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
10%
ÉÉÉÉÉ 10%
0%
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
10% 10%

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 20 %

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 488 ns
(244 + 244) DM0053EA1

Figure 22 Mask figure in 2048 kbit/s interface


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 61

3.3.3 Measurement interface 2048 kbit/s

The transmitted or received 2048 kbit/s signal of each 2 Mbit/s interface


can be measured via this interface.

Bit rate 2048 kbit/s ±50 ppm


Code HDB3
Pulse shape see figure 22
Peak voltage 2.37 V/75 ohms
No-pulse height 0.237 V/75 ohms
Pulse width 244 ±20 ns
Amplitude ratio
between positive and
negative pulses 0.95...1.05
Width ratio between
positive and negative
pulses 0.95...1.05

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
T/12 T/12 T/12 T/12 T/12 T/12

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
+U

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
+U1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
-U1
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
-U2
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
T/4 T/4 T/4 T/4

SIGNAL T=Average cycle length of


MONOTONOUS clock signal
DM0052EA1

Figure 23 Clock signal output mask figure


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 62

3.3.4 Parameters of service interface (MI/MO)

The interface complies with CCITT Recommendation V.11.

Output

Output impedance < 100 ohms


Output differential voltage 2.0 V < UT < 4.0 V
Logic states
- 1" UT < -2.0 V
- 0" UT > 2.0 V
- 3-state" |I| < 100 mA; |U| < 5 V
Short-circuit current < 150 mA
Rise and fall time between 10 %
and 90 % pulse amplitudes < 20 ns
Overshoot < 10 %

Input

Input impedance > 4 kohms


Threshold voltage |UR| < 0.2 V
Logic states:
- 1" UR < -0.2 V
- 0" UR > +0.2 V

3.3.5 Data channel interface (DI/DO)

The interface complies with CCITT Recommendation V.11. Its charĆ


acteristics are similar to those of the service interface, but without the
3-state characteristics.

3.3.6 Programmable alarm outputs PA1 and PA2

Active state: I > 2.5 mA, Udc < 1 V


Passive state: I < 50 mA, -75 V < Udc < -12 V
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 63

3.4 Jitter and fading characteristics

The DB 2 equipment meet the jitter (2 Mbit/s) and fading requirements


defined in CCITT Recommendation G.823.

3.4.1 Jitter and fading tolerance

The allowed jitter in all 2 Mbit/s input interfaces is shown in figure 24.

A
p-p

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
36.9 UI

ÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
A0

ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
A1 1.5 UI

ÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉ
0.2 UI

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
A2
f
-5
1.2 x 10 Hz 20 Hz 2.4 kHz 18 kHz 100 kHz
DB1255EA1

Figure 24 Lower limit of the jitter and fading tolerance in the 2 Mbit/s
interface

The figure also shows the limits of low-frequency jitter (= fading)


measured between any two 2 Mbit/s interfaces of a branching equipment

3.4.2 Network synchronization

To prevent uncontrolled slips in the buffer memories of the DB 2 equipĆ


ment, the signals fed into the 2 Mbit/s interfaces must be mesochronous
(on an average of the same frequency) with regard to each other.

A permanent difference in frequency causes a controlled slip so that a


whole frame (one 8 kHz sample/64 kbit/s channel) is either left out or reĆ
peated.

The slip interval is 256/df. Symbol df stands for the frequency difference
of the 2 Mbit/s signals.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 64

3.4.3 Jitter transfer function between two 2 Mbit/s interfaces

When the buffered mode is used in the DB 2 (master clock in direction 1)


the jitter transfer function in directions 1->1, 1->2 and 1->3 meets
the requirement of the mask in figure 25.

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
0.5 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
Jitter
amplification
0
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
400 Hz

(dB)
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ 20 dB/

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ decade

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
fo fc = 40 Hz
DM0046EA1

Figure 25 Jitter transfer function in buffered mode

When the unbuffered mode is used in the DB 2, the jitter transfer function
between two interfaces meets the requirement of the mask in figure 26.

3.4.4 Jitter amplification from external clock interface

When the equipment's own clock, locked to an external clock, is conĆ


nected to one of the 2 Mbit/s outputs in the equipment, the jitter transfer
function meets the requirement of the mask figure in figure 25.

3.4.5 Jitter generation from the equipment's own clock

When the clock of an output is taken from the own clock of the DB 2, not
locked to an external clock, the output jitter does not exceed the value
0.01 UI measured within the frequency range 20 Hz...100 kHz.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 65

Amplification
dB

ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ 20 dB/decade
1
0
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉ
ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ
f

5 Hz 50 kHz
DB1254EA1

Figure 26 Jitter transfer function in unbuffered mode

3.4.6 2 Mbit/s interface jitter generation


When the input of a 2 Mbit/s interface has no jitter, the jitter in the 2
Mbit/s output using the clock of this interface is < 0.1 UI. The measureĆ
ment is performed within the frequency range of 20 Hz...100 kHz.
The measurement is performed between the following interfaces:

- Branching equipment in buffered mode (master clock direction 1):


- from input 1 to output 1
- from input 1 to output 2
- from input 1 to output 3

- Branching equipment in unbuffered mode


(master clock direction 1):
- from input 1 to output 2
- from input 2 to output 1
- from input 1 to output 3
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Functional Description
II/1
6.3.1992 Page 66

3.5 Power supply

Supply voltage 20...72 V


Power consumption <5W DB 2B and DB 2T
< 10 W DB 2P

The power consumption parameters of the channel units are given in the
description of each unit.

3.6 Mechanical dimensions

Cartridge

20 T 262 x 112 x 219 mm


40 T 262 x 232 x 219 mm

Rack

Height 1600, 2200 or 2700 mm


Width (1...n) x 120 mm
Depth 260 mm

Unit (EURO-2 sized PCB, 6 U)

Height 233 mm
Width 26 mm
Depth 160 mm
Weight 0.3 kg

3.7 Environmental requirements

The environmental requirements are defined in a separate document


Environmental Specification for ND Equipment". The environmental
categories for Digital Branching Equipment DB 2 are N1 and K1.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 1

DB 2

2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

Installation

Contents

Page
1 CARTRIDGE EQUIPPING 3

2 CABLING OF B2 AND X2 UNITS 4


2.1 Front connectors of B2 and X2 units 4
2.2 Cabling of service connector P1 7
2.3 Cabling of 2048 kbit/s interfaces 8
2.4 Marking of cabling (marking card) 12 (13)

Prepared by Checked Approved Number


SHy/J. Kapanen/si DB200-0056-SED1
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 2
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 3

1 CARTRIDGE EQUIPPING

The DB 2 equipment is installed in cartridges that are mounted into racks.


The installation and cabling of the rack are described in the Operating
Handbook for the TM4 Construction Practice. The basic cartridges are
available in two sizes: 20 T (four unit locations) and 40 T (eight unit locaĆ
tions).

NOKIA

B2 X2 CH CH

Rack

20 T
cartridge

1 2 3 4
LOCATION UNIT
1 B2 unit
2 X2 unit
3 Channel Unit 1 (B2 unit II / DB 2P)
4 Channel Unit 2 (X2 unit II / DB 2P)
DB1201EA1

Figure 1 Equipping example DB 2B


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 4

Figure 1 shows an equipping example: a 20 T cartridge is provided with


the DB 2 branching equipment consisting of the Branching Unit (B2),
Switching Unit (X2) and two Channel Units (CH).

The cartridge or cartridge combination used depends on the equipment


configuration. The DB 2 equipment takes two (DB 2B and DB 2T) or four
(DB 2P) unit locations, the channel units and most auxiliary units one unit
location (5 T).

Each unit in the cartridge is provided with an address based on unit locaĆ
tion. This address is used when the unit is controlled via the service interĆ
face e.g. by Service Terminal or Transmission Management Computer.
The address of the leftmost unit location is 1, the address of the next unit
location is 2, etc.

The DB 2B and DB 2T equipment are inserted in unit locations 1 (B2)


and 2 (X2). The DB 2P equipment is inserted in unit locations 1 (B2 I), 2
(X2 I), 3 (B2 II), and 4 (X2 II).

The 40 T cartridge can be extended with corresponding DM 2 cartridges


(unit locations 9, 10, 11 etc.). The 20 T cartridges cannot be chained in this
way.

Power supply and rack alarm interfaces

When a branching, switching or channel unit is inserted into the cartridge,


it is simultaneously connected to the central battery voltages and rack
alarm buses via its back connector PB1 and the cartridge motherboard. At
the same time, the unit is grounded to the cartridge body.

2 CABLING OF B2 AND X2 UNITS

This description explains the cabling of the DB 2 equipment branching


unit and switching unit. Cabling of other units is described in the installaĆ
tion instructions for the unit in question. General cabling instructions
complying with the TM4 Construction Practice and connection instrucĆ
tions for connectors can be found in the Operating Handbook for TM4
Construction Practice.

2.1 Front connectors of the B2 and X2 units

The front connectors of the B2 and X2 unit versions are shown in Figures
2 and 3.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 5

B2
CC 24001/120 W CC 24001/75 W CC 24002/75 W
P1 a b c
P1
a b c
P1 a b c
SERVICE
IN MIA a7 c7 MOA SERVICE MIA a7 c7 MOA MIA a7 c7 MOA
MIB a6 c6 MOB OUT MIB a6 c6 MOB MIB a6 c6 MOB
DATA DIA a5 c5 DOA DATA DIA a5 c5 DOA DIA a5 c5 DOA
IN DIB a4 c4 DOB OUT DIB a4 c4 DOB DIB a4 c4 DOB
a3 c3 a3 c3 a3 c3
PA1 a2 c2 PA2 PA1 a2 c2 PA2 PA1 a2 c2 PA2
a1 c1 PIN a1 c1 PIN a1 c1 PIN

b1...7 GND b1...7 GND b1...7 GND

MEAS. MEAS. MEAS.


OUT OUT OUT

RED RED RED

YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW

GREEN GREEN GREEN

P3 a c P3 a c

RLSS a31 c31 TLSS


J3 2M IN
2M 2M 2M RLSU a29 c29 TLSU 2M
IN RLSC a27 c27 TLSC OUT IN RLSC a27 c27 TLSC OUT J4 2M OUT

RLSG a25 c25 TLSG


1 1 1 1 1

RLSS a15 c15 TLSS

2M RLSU a13 c13 TLSU 2M


J5 2M IN
2M 2M
IN RLSC a11 c11 TLSC OUT IN RLSC a11 c11 TLSC OUT 2M OUT
J6
RLSG a9 c9 TLSG
2 2 2 2 2

DB1202EA2

Figure 2 Front connectors of Branching Unit B2 unit versions


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 6

X2
CC 24010/120 W CC 24010/75 W CC 24011/75 W

MEAS. MEAS. MEAS.


OUT OUT OUT

RED RED RED

YELLOW YELLOW YELLOW

GREEN GREEN GREEN

P3 a c P3 a c

RLSS a31 c31 TLSS


J3 2M IN
2M 2M 2M RLSU a29 c29 TLSU 2M
IN RLSC a27 c27 TLSC OUT IN RLSC a27 c27 TLSC OUT J4 2M OUT

3 RLSG a25 c25 TLSG 3 3 3 3


RSSS a23 c23 TSSS
J5 SYNC. IN

SYNC. RSSU a21 c21 TSSU SYNC.


SYNC. SYNC.
IN OUT
J6 SYNC. OUT
IN RSSC a19 c19 TSSC OUT RSSC a19 c19 TSSC

RSSG a17 c17 TSSG

c5 TESU c5 TESU TEST OUT


TEST TEST
OUT OUT (TTL)
(TTL) (TTL)
c1 TESG c1 TESG

DB1203EA1

Figure 3 Front connectors of Switching Unit X2 unit versions


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 7

2.2 Cabling of service connector P1

Service connector P1 is located on the branching unit B2 and is similar in


all unit versions. It includes the DB 2 equipment service interface (MI),
data channel interface (DI) and programmable alarm interfaces (PA1,
PA2, PIN).

Via the service interface, the DB 2 is connected to the Service Terminal or


to the centralized Transmission Management System. Via the data chanĆ
nel interface, the equipment data channel operating on the sampling
principle can be taken into use. The alarm interface consists of programĆ
mable alarm outputs (PA1, PA2) and a programmable alarm input (PIN).

abc
Service interface, input A MIA a7 c7 MOA Service interface, output A
Service interface, input B MIB a6 c6 MOB Service interface, output B
Data interface, input A DIA a5 c5 DOA Data interface, output A
Data interface, input B DIB a4 c4 DOB Data interface, output B
Programmable alarm output 1 PA1 a2 c2 PA2 Programmable alarm output 2
+5 V test point +5V a1 c1 PIN Programmable alarm input
(1 kohm serial resistance)
b1...7 GND Ground DB1273EA2

Figure 4 Service connector P1 interfaces

Cabling is recommended to be performed using a 1/4 Euroconnector and


two symmetrical pair cables. Recommendations on the use of cables and
connectors as well as work instructions for symmetrical cabling can be
found in the Operating Handbook for TM4 Construction Practice.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 8

INTERFACE CABLE
PIN SYMBOL PAIR COLOUR

a7 MIA blue
a6 MIB 1 white
b7 GND clear

c7 MOA orange
c6 MOB 2 white
b6 GND clear

a5 DIA blue
a4 DIB 1 white
b5 GND clear

c5 DOA orange
c4 DOB 2 white
b4 GND clear

Table 1 Cabling of service connector P1

2.3 Cabling of 2048 kbit/s interfaces

The DB 2 equipment 2048 kbit/s interfaces are, depending on the chosen


unit, either in one full-length Euroconnector (B2: CC 24001, X2: CC
24010) or in four coaxial connectors (B2: CC 24002, X2: CC 24011).

2.3.1 Units CC 24001 and CC 24010

The branching unit (B2) connector P3 includes the DB 2 equipment 2048


kbit/s equipment interfaces 1 and 2. Connector P3 of the switching unit
(X2) includes the 2048 kbit/s equipment interface 3 and the synchronizĆ
ation interface, see Figures 2 and 3 as well as Tables 2 and 3.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 9

PIN SYMBOL USE

a31 RLSS1 Received 2048 kbit/s signal; 120 ohms


a29 RLSU1 Received 2048 kbit/s signal; 75 ohms
a27 RLSC1 Received 2048 kbit/s signal; common
a25 RLSG1 Received signal ground
c31 TLSS1Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; 120 ohms
c29 TLSU1 Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; 75 ohms
c27 TLSC1 Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; common
c25 TLSG1 Transmitted signal ground

a15 RLSS2 Received 2048 kbit/s signal; 120 ohms


a13 RLSU2 Received 2048 kbit/s signal; 75 ohms
a11 RLSC2 Received 2048 kbit/s signal; common
a9 RLSG2 Received signal ground
c15 TLSS2Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; 120 ohms
c13 TLSU2 Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; 75 ohms
c11 TLSC2 Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; common
c9 TLSG2 Transmitted signal ground

Table 2 Equipment interfaces 1 and 2 in Branching Unit B2


(CC 24001)

PIN SYMBOL USE

a31 RLSS Received 2048 kbit/s signal; 120 ohms


a29 RLSU Received 2048 kbit/s signal; 75 ohms
a27 RLSC Received 2048 kbit/s signal; common
a25 RLSG Received signal ground
c31 TLSS Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; 120 ohms
c29 TLSU Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; 75 ohms
c27 TLSC Transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal; common
c25 TLSG Transmitted signal ground

a23 RSSS Received synchronization signal; 120 ohms


a21 RSSU Received synchronization signal; 75 ohms
a19 RSSC Received synchronization signal; common
a17 RSSG Received synchronization signal ground
c23 TSSS Transmitted synchr. signal; 120 ohms
c21 TSSU Transmitted synchr. signal; 75 ohms
c19 TSSC Transmitted synchr. signal; common
c17 TSSG Transmitted synchr. signal ground

Table 3 Equipment interface 3 and synchronization interface in


Switching Unit X2 (CC 24010)
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 10

Cabling

Cabling is recommended to be performed using 1/4 Euroconnectors and


symmetrical pair cable, in which case one connector and a half of the pair
cable are required for each interface. Recommendations on the use of
cables and connectors as well as work instructions for symmetrical cabling
can be found in the Operating Handbook for TM4 Construction Practice.

A cabling example with cable


NOKIA KLVMAAM 2 x (2 x 0.4 + 0.4) + 0.4 mm:

INTERFACE/pin CABLE

1,3 2 SYMBOL PAIR 120 ohms 75 ohms

a31 a15 RLSS blue


a29 a13 RLSU 1 blue
a27 a11 RLSC white white
a25 a9 RLSG clear clear

c31 c15 TLSS orange


c29 c13 TLSU 2 orange
c27 c11 TLSC white white
c25 c9 TLSG clear clear

Table 4 Cabling of 2048 kbit/s equipment interfaces 1, 2 and 3

INTERFACE/pin CABLE

SYMBOL PAIR 120 ohms 75 ohms

a23 RSSS blue


a21 RSSU 1 blue
a19 RSSC white white
a17 RSSG clear clear

c23 TSSS orange


c21 TSSU 2 orange
c19 TSSC white white
c17 TSSG clear clear

Table 5 Cabling of 2048 kHz synchronization interface


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 11

2.3.2 Units CC 24002 and CC 24011

The branching unit (B2) connectors J3, J4, J5 and J6 include the 2048
kbit/s equipment interfaces 1 and 2 of the DB 2B equipment. The switchĆ
ing unit (X2) connectors J3 and J4 include the 2048 kbit/s equipment inĆ
terface 3, and connectors J5 and J6 include the synchronization interface,
see Figures 2 and 3 as well as Tables 6 and 7.

SMB coaxial cable and coaxial connectors are used both in the 2048 kbit/s
equipment interfaces and in the synchronization interface. RecommenĆ
dations on the use of cables and connectors can be found in the Operating
Handbook for TM4 Construction Practice.

CC 24002: equipment interfaces 1 and 2; 75 ohms

J3 RLS1 2048 kbit/s signal received in interface 1


J4 TLS1 2048 kbit/s signal transmitted from interf. 1
J5 RLS2 2048 kbit/s signal received in interface 2
J6 TLS2 2048 kbit/s signal transmitted from interf. 2

Table 6 Equipment interfaces 1 and 2; 75 ohms

CC 24011: equipment interface 3 and synchronization interface;


75 ohms

J3 RLS 2048 kbit/s signal received in interface 3


J4 TLS 2048 kbit/s signal transmitted from interf. 3
J5 RSS Received synchronization signal
J6 TSS Transmitted synchronization signal

Table 7 Equipment interface 3 and synchronization interface;


75 ohms
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 12

2.4 Marking of cabling (marking card)

The cables are to be marked so that it is later possible to see where they
lead. The markings should specify the equipment and connectors conĆ
cerned. The cabling information, as well as information on the use of
jumper settings, is also recorded on a marking card delivered with the
equipment (figure 5).

Instructions regarding the markings can be found in the Operating HandĆ


book for the TM4 Construction Practice.

Properly filled in, the card also facilitates servicing, testing, and installaĆ
tion at a later stage.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Installation
II/2
6.3.1992 Page 13

DB 2 CC 24001

Unit location:
Equipm. ID:
Address:
MARKING OF THE CABLE MARKING INDICATING
END CONNECTED TO UNIT THE CONNECTION POINT
Cable identification: FOR THE OTHER CABLE END
This end Other end

DB 2/B2
CC 24001
abc
MIR -
MIA 7 MOA
MIT -
MIB
DIA 5
MOB
DOA DIR -
DIB
PA1
3
DOB
PA2
DIT -
1

MEAS

EXAMPLE OF
MARKING

RLS1 -1B02S4xxx 1
B
Rack row
Rack
02 Cartridge location
RLSx a c TLSx TLS1 - S Cartridge shelf (R =
R120 T120
cables from above,
7 S = cables from below
R75 5 T75
into cartridge)
RCOMM 3 TCOMM
1
4 Unit location
RGND TGND xxx Connector for the other
RLS2 - cable end

TLS2 -

DB1266EA2

Figure 5 Marking card, cabling information


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 1

DB 2

2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

Operation

Contents

Page
1 START-UP OF THE DB 2 3

2 SETTINGS 4
2.1 Identifications and settings 4
2.2 Statistics resetting 7
3 JUMPER SETTINGS: B2 AND X2 UNITS 8
3.1 Information on jumper settings on marking card 8
3.2 Locations of jumper settings on units B2 and X2 10
3.3 Jumper setting alternatives 12
4 EXAMPLES ON BRANCHING TABLE USE 14
4.1 Conditional branching tables 14
4.2 Table combinations 14
5 USE OF VOICE-FREQUENCY COMMON CHANNELS
(TYPE S) 15

6 USE OF PROTECTED BRANCHING EQUIPMENT


DB 2P 16
6.1 Synchronization 16
6.2 Changing the units 16
7 USE OF LOOP NETWORK BRANCHING EQUIPMENT 17
7.1 Applications 17
7.2 Use 17
7.3 Construction of a stable network 18
7.4 Buffered Slave stations 18
7.5 Network synchronization in fault conditions 18
7.6 Protection of channel connections 18
7.7 Protection of data channel 23
7.8 Synchronization of a mesh network 24 (24)

Prepared by Checked Approved Number


J. Kapanen/si DB200-0054-SEE1
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 2
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 3

1 START-UP OF THE DB 2

1 Placethe B2, X2, and the channel units, if any are used, into a DB 2 equipment cartridge: B2 in location 1
and X2 in location 2 (stabilization time for the equipment approx. 10 seconds).

2 Connect the Service Terminal to the service connector of the B2 unit and establish a connection to the
equipment (connection cables unconnected):

Current object:
OBJ 7 RET Response obtained: AD 4095/DB 2B
9600 bit/s
/EOB/

The green LED is lit to indicate that a connection from the Service Terminal to the equipment has been
established.

3 Perform equipment installation by installing all units:

(duration
OBJ 6 , 2 , 3 RET approx. 10
sec.)

Response Installing
/EOB/
displayed:

Verify:

TOP 6 , 2 , 0 RET

Response: B2/UN unit 1


X2/UN unit 2
/EOB/

4 Check error messages given by equipment: If the response includes actual


error messages:
- installation error
TOP 1 RET - missing unit
- malfunction
- table error
- memory fault

their validity can be checked by giving the initialization command which resets the EEPROMs of the
equipment and loads the default settings into them from the EPROMs.

TOP 9 , 6 , 99 , 59 RET

Wait approximately for 15 seconds and check the fault display again:

TOP 1 RET

NOTE! Voltage calibrations must be performed after the initialization command has
been given, if the supply voltage measuring
function is to be used.

If the response includes mere alarms (e.g. Rx signal missing), continue by setting the
operation parameters, i.e. proceed to chapter 2, Settings.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 4

2 SETTINGS

Operation of the DB 2 Branching Equipment is controlled via the service


interface using e.g. the Service Terminal. Through this interface, equipĆ
ment state and alarm data are read, controls and settings are given, loopĆ
backs are set, etc. If the service interfaces have been connected into a bus
and the buses have been further connected into a service network by
means of the data channel, all equipment connected to the bus or network
can be controlled remotely from one point using a Service Terminal, DB 2
Manager or Transmission Management System TMS (refer to the related
operating handbooks).

This description explains commissioning of the Branching Unit B2 and


the Switching Unit X2 of the DB 2 equipment. Commissioning of channel
units is explained in the individual Operating Handbook of each unit. The
service menus obtained from the equipment and their use are described
in section Operation with Service Terminal of this book.

The DB 2B equipment is ready to operate after its installation into a carĆ


tridge, hardware configuration, and the connection of signal cables. BeĆ
fore commissioning, however, the identifications and settings should be
checked, and the statistics and error counters must be reset.

When other equipment types (e.g. DB 2B-LP, DB 2T and DB 2P) are


taken into use or when programs of another equipment type are saved to
the equipment, an initializing command (9,6,99,59) is given after the proĆ
gram has been saved. The command resets the EEPROM and, after that,
loads the basic settings (e.g. default settings, factory settings, identificaĆ
tions) characteristic to the equipment concerned from the EPROM to the
EEPROM. The command performs also the HW configuration and
resets the units. The command is given from the main level (TOP) as a
command string; approx. 15 seconds must elapse before other measures
can be taken.

2.1 Identifications and settings


In connection with the commissioning, the following equipment identifiĆ
cations and settings shall be checked and the required changes be made.
The number of the service menu through which the change is made as well
as the possible default or factory setting are given in parentheses.
2.1.1 Identifications

Equipment ID (4,7,2/DB2xxAB)
Used, when necessary, in network management to identify a set of equipĆ
ment, in addition to the address. The ID is also shown on the Fault DisĆ
play. The identification may be, for example, the equipment type and an
abbreviation related to the route (altogether max. 15 characters).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 5

Interface IDs (4,7,4/ - )

Connection-specific identifications that can be used in network manageĆ


ment. Example: HEL 91-->ESP 10

2.1.2 Settings

Baud rate (6,1,1/9600 bit/s)

If the equipment are not in a bus, it is advisable to use a rate as high as


possible (9600). When the bus is used, the highest rate is determined by
the slowest connection, e.g. data channel in the network concerned.

Address (6,1,2/1)

Each equipment in the bus shall have its own address by means of which it
can be accessed separately. An equipment which is not in the bus does not
need an address, since the connection can be established using address
4095 (OBJ 7) common to all equipment.

Equipment II of the protected branching equipment DB 2P automatiĆ


cally obtains an address which is one number higher than the address of
the equipment I.

Rack alarm functions (6,1,3/normal)

If the rack alarms are not to be given in the normal way, e.g. during comĆ
missioning, the alarms can be disabled or urgent alarms A can be replaced
by less urgent alarms B.

Rack alarm delay (6,1,4/3 s)

If short, individual alarms are to be filtered, i.e., if they are to be preĆ


vented from causing rack alarm A, a time > 0 is set here. However, conĆ
tinuous short alarms will even then cause a rack alarm.

Programmable alarm output PA1 and PA2 functions (6,1,5 and


6,1,6/activated by alarms A and B)

An alarm is selected by these settings to activate the outputs PA1 and PA2.
From them, alarm data can be collected with a fault monitoring system.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 6

Timeout for controls (6,1,7/10 min)


A time is selected during which the controls remain active. Normally, the
time is short (< 10 min) but if one wishes to keep a certain control (e.g.
loopback in connection with testing) active for a longer period, the time-
out can be set to be greater (max. 65000 min). The time-out has no effect
on the control Signal to MEAS output.

Data hybrid configuration (6,1,8/OFF)


Use of the data hybrid depends on the structure of the service network.
When the data hybrid is off, a connection to the equipment can be estabĆ
lished only via the service interface of the equipment. When the data hyĆ
brid is set on, a simultaneous connection to the TS0 data channels of all
three 2M interfaces is established. Data channel use of each interface can
be controlled independently.

Data channel protection (6,1,9/OFF)


When the data channel is used in a loop network, the data channel protecĆ
tion in one of the network equipment is set ON, while in others it is set
OFF.

Selection ON disconnects the data channel at the station concerned when


there are no failures in the network. If the loop network includes buffered
slave stations, selection ON must be made either at the first buffered slave
station or at a station preceding the first buffered slave station in direction
1 of the master station.

Equipment installation, Install all (6,2,3)

All the units currently belonging to the configuration are installed simulĆ
taneously.

"Installing..." is displayed on the Service Terminal after the selection. SeĆ


lection 0 (6,2,0) displays all the installed units or "Installing..." if installaĆ
tion is still in progress (duration approx. 10 seconds).

MUX settings (6,3,)

By MUX settings, the Master timing source of the equipment, the signal
to the synchronization output, and the buffer mode of the main branch are
selected (refer to Operation with Service Terminal).

Edit branching table (6,4,1)

By means of this setting, the user determines the desired channel connecĆ
tions between different interfaces (refer to Operation with Service TerĆ
minal).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 7

Activate table (6,4,2,t)

This setting activates either a branching table defined by the user or one
of the test tables in the equipment.

2M interfaces (6,5,d,6,in use)

When channel units are used in the DB 2 equipment, the 2M interface of


direction 3 must be removed from use (6,5,3,6,2).

Default settings (6,6,121)

With this setting, the so-called default settings can be restored to the
equipment. Does not affect the factory settings (e.g. Baud rate, Address,
Data hybrid configuration) or Calibration of voltage measurement. The
default settings differ according to equipment type, refer to Operation
with Service Terminal.

Protections (10,4,2/no protection)

Some of the transmission management functions of the equipment can be


protected against misuse. The protection is implemented by setting either
a password (remote operation possible) or PIN signal as the condition for
operation. Settings and controls can be performed only locally, if the PIN
signal is required, and thus the possibility of misuse is smaller but, on the
other hand, the remote-controlled network management becomes more
difficult.

Password (10,4,3/ - )

The password may consist of 1...7 characters. The protection is activated


with option 10,4,2 Protections. It is recommended that the password is set
only after the commissioning of the equipment and when the connection
functions faultlessly.

2.2 Statistics resetting

Signal quality statistics and error counters are reset before commissionĆ
ing:
- Reset statistics (8,1,1/2,1)
- Reset error counters (8,2,1/2/3,5)
- Reset CPU-reset counters (8,3,1 and 8,9,2,3,1).

In this way, it is made sure that the compilation of statistics and error
counting start from the commissioning.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 8

3 JUMPER SETTINGS: B2 AND X2 UNITS

3.1 Information on jumper settings on marking card

DB 2 CC 24001

Unit location:
Equipm. ID:
Address:

Selections: INSTRUCTIONS FOR MARKING


THE JUMPER SETTINGS
No connection
Connection (with U-link)
Connected at factory
Connection made at installation
(fill the right box)

SUPPLY VOLTAGE TO CONNECTION INSTRUCTIONS


UNIT-INTERFACE: OF JUMPER SETTINGS
VN5 VP5
a
b
NR1 NR8

Alternatives:
a: DB2 B, DB2 T and DB2 P unit 1
b: DB2 P unit 3

INTERFACES:
a b c
T75 NR2, NR4
R75 NR3, NR5
RGND

Alternatives:
a: 120 ohm symmetric interface
b: 75 ohm asymmetric interface
c: 75 ohm interf. input signal MARKING OF JUMPER SETTINGS
ground connected to frame IN EFFECT/
FACTORY SETTINGS
LOCATIONS OF Supply voltage to unit-interface:
JUMPER SETTINGS
ON PCB CC24001 a
b
NR1 NR8
VN5 VP5

Interface 1 (L):
a b c

Interface 2 (K):
NR4 (L)
a b c
NR5

NR2 (K)
NR3

DB1268EB1

Figure 1 Information on jumper settings on marking card


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 9

A marking card is delivered with the equipment. One side of the card is
reserved for information on jumper settings (see figure 1) and the other
for cabling information.

The card contains concise instructions for setting the jumpers, a drawing
of the locations of the jumper settings on the PCB and space for marking
the jumper settings in effect. It also shows the factory settings (jumpers) of
the equipment.

Properly filled in, the card also facilitates servicing, testing and installaĆ
tion at a later stage.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 10

3.2 Locations of jumper settings on units B2 and X2

Figures 2 and 3 show the locations of jumper settings on DB 2 units.

-5 V +5 V
VN5 VP5
P1 B2
NR1 NR8
Disconnection points
of bus voltages
PB1

J2

Red

Yellow

Green

NR4
NR5

P3 NR2
NR3

T75

R75
RGND

DB1204EA2
Jumper in Jumper out

Figure 2 Locations of jumper settings on branching unit B2


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 11

J2
X2

PB1

Red

Yellow

Green

NR4
NR5

P3 NR2
NR3

T75

R75
RGND

DB1205EA2
Jumper in Jumper out

Figure 3 Locations of jumper settings in switching unit X2


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 12

3.3 Jumper setting alternatives

2048 kbit/s interfaces in B2 and X2

The sheath of the input cable can be connected to equipment ground and,
additionally, it can be selected in units CC 24001 (B2) and CC 24010 (X2)
whether a 120 ohm balanced interface or a 75 ohm unbalanced interface
is used.

Jumpers
B2: NR3,NR5 NR2,NR4
Alternative X2: NR5 NR4 Impedance Input cable sheath

a 120 ohms Connected to equipment


ground
75 ohms
b Disconnected from
equipment ground

c 75 ohms Connected to equipment


ground

d 120 ohms Disconnected from


equipment ground

DB1274EA2

Figure 4 2048 kbit/s interfaces in B2 and X2,


jumper setting alternatives

Synchronization interface in X2

The sheath of the input cable can be connected to equipment ground and,
additionally, it can be selected in unit CC 24010 whether a 120 ohm balĆ
anced interface or a 75 ohm unbalanced interface is used:

Jumpers
Alternative X2: NR3 NR2 Impedance Input cable sheath

a Connected to equipment
120 ohms ground

b 75 ohms Disconnected from


equipment ground

c 75 ohms
Connected to equipment
ground

Disconnected from
d 120 ohms equipment ground

DB1275EA2

Figure 5 Synchronization interface in X2,


jumper setting alternatives
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 13

Disconnection points for bus voltages

The B2 unit gives the supply voltage (+5 V, -5 V) to the bus transmitters
of other units. The voltages can be disconnected by removing jumpers at
NR8 and NR1, but they should be in during normal operation, see figure
2.

In the DB 2P protecting equipment (unit location 3), jumpers at NR8 and


NR 1 are removed. The jumpers at the NR8 and NR1 shall be removed
also when interface units with no power supply of their own (e.g. TU
21234) or separate DC/DC converter (TG 21266) are used.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 14

4 EXAMPLES ON BRANCHING TABLE USE


4.1 Conditional branching tables
Conditional tables are used when branching definitions for the equipĆ
ment are to be changed in the network failures. 1-3 part conditions
(Co1-Co3) can be defined for the table. Any of the data, signalling, or
alarm bit 0/1-states received from directions 1-3, or a usable 2M signal
of the direction can serve as a part condition. The actual condition for the
table is composed of the relation between the part conditions, and it is to
be defined by the user. Usually, a condition where all part conditions must
be in true state (Co1&Co2&Co3) is used. An undefined part condition is
in true state.

In addition, a priority (1-8; 1 = the highest) must be set for a conditional


branching table. According to this definition, the equipment selects for
use the table with the highest priority among the tables in true state. SevĆ
eral tables cannot be provided with the same priority.

4.2 Table combinations


It is possible to combine the tables when it is desired to save the limited
storage capacity reserved for the branching tables. Table numbers 10 and
20 are reserved for so-called basic tables, and the following nine tables
(11-19 and 21-29) for additional definitions. When e.g. table 12 is actiĆ
vated, the definitions of both table 10 and table 12 become effective.
When the additional definitions are displayed, also the definition lines of
the basic table are displayed.

Combining is very useful e.g. when conditional branching tables are used.

Example

Table 10:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B2: 17-31 17-31
MF

Table 11:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B0: 1-15 1-15
B2: 17-31 17-31
Prio: 1
(Co1 & Co2) & Co3
Co1: 1/RX 2M
Co2: True
Co3: True
MF

Table 12:
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 15

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


B2: 1-15 1-15
B2: 17-31 17-31
Prio: 2
Always true
MF

In the case described above, the definitions for table 11 are effective, if a
usable 2M signal (fault category <4) is received from direction 1, i.e., if
the condition is in true state. If the condition for table 11 is untrue, table
12, the condition of which is always in true state, but which, on the other
hand, is provided with a lower priority, becomes effective.

1-15 1-15 1-15

17-31 17-31

17-31 1-15 17-31


DB1284EA1

Figure 6 Branching defined in tables 10-12

5 USE OF VOICE-FREQUENCY COMMON CHANNELS (TYPE S)


When it is desired to define one (or more) channel(s) of the E&M unit TU
21232, SUB/SUB unit TU 21205, or SUB/EXCH unit TU 21215 confiĆ
gured in the DB 2 equipment as VF-common channels, all time slot alloĆ
cations of the channel unit concerned must be made in one of the areas
defined below in order to achieve continuous signalling required by comĆ
mon channel signalling:
TS 1-7 (max. 7 channels into use)
TS 8-15
TS 17-23 (max. 7 channels into use)
TS 24-31
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 16

6 USE OF PROTECTED BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2P


6.1 Synchronization
When the DB 2P is the equipment providing the master clock in a proĆ
tected chain, the internal clock of the equipment is selected as the timing
source with the highest priority (6,3,2,1,5) and the equipment is set in bufĆ
fered timing mode (6,3,4,2).
If the equipment serves as an intermediate station in the chain, the Rx
clock of the desired direction d (d = 1 or 2) is selected as the timing source
with priority 1 (6,3,2,1,d) and the synchronization input clock is selected
as the timing source with priority 2 (6,3,2,2,4). In addition, the following
measures shall be taken:
- select Rx clock of direction d to the synchronization output of equipĆ
ment II (6,9,4,3,3,1,d)
- enable disconnection of the synchronization output of equipment II
in fault conditions of the selected clock (6,9,4,3,3,2,1)
- connect the synchronization output of equipment II to the synchronĆ
ization input of equipment I (external cabling).

6.2 Changing the units


The units included in the configuration compose a back-up loop where
the settings of each unit are copied also to the unit next to it. The units can
therefore be changed without losing the settings provided that the followĆ
ing instructions are followed:
- change one unit at a time
- let the equipment become stabilized after the change before removĆ
ing the next unit
- set the priority of the opposite equipment higher so as to minimize
disturbances in connection with transmission (6,7,3,2/3).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 17

7 USE OF LOOP NETWORK BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

7.1 Applications

The loop network branching equipment can be used to:

a) protect network synchronization in fault conditions


b) protect channel connections
c) protect TS0 data channel.

7.2 Use

When the default settings have been given (6,6), the equipment is ready to
operate as a slave station in a loop network with the following settings:

- unbuffered timing mode in the main branch

- network control bits in directions 1 and 2:


TS0/B4 = MCB = Master Clk Bit
TS0/B5 = LCB = Loop Clk Bit

- the timing for direction 3, and also for directions 1 and 2 if automatic
buffering has been set on, depends on the fault conditions of the netĆ
work (Rx1, Rx2 or Internal)

Prio 1: Slave LP
Prio 2: Internal

- sampling frequency of the TS0 data channel is 8 kHz

After the default settings have been selected, the master station of the
network has to be provided with the following settings:

- timing source of the 1st priority: Master LP (6,3,2,1,8)

- the actual timing source (Rx3, External clock, or Internal) is defined


as the timing source of the 2nd priority: (6,3,2,2,3/4/5)

- buffered timing mode (6,3,4,2)

The MCB and LCB bits are transmitted from the master station in state
"0". The "0"-state of the MCB bit implies that the Rx clock of the direcĆ
tion concerned is provided by the master station, and the "0"-state of the
LCB bit implies that there are no clock loopbacks in the direction conĆ
cerned. The states of the loop network control bits in each equipment can
be verified by selection 6,3,2,4.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 18

7.3 Construction of a stable network


The network must be in working order in and after fault conditions. It
must therefore be constructed so that equipment interface 1 is connected
to interface 2 of the next equipment etc.

7.4 Buffered slave stations


Some or all of the slave stations can be set also in buffered timing mode.
The buffered mode prevents the timing faults caused by disconnected sigĆ
nals from spreading into the entire loop: the faults are not transmitted beĆ
yond the first buffered station

7.5 Network synchronization in fault conditions


A loop network tolerates one break without losing its synchronization. If
there are two or more breaks, the sections separated from the master staĆ
tion are synchronized as independent chain networks. After the eliminĆ
ation of the break(s), the sections immediately synchronize with the clock
of the master station.

7.6 Protection of channel connections


The channel connections can be protected either by using channel (or
channel group) -specific protection switches (branching of type Y) or by
conditional branching tables.
7.6.1 Channel-specific protection switches

When channel-specific protection is used, identical time slot informaĆ


tion is transmitted together with the so-called pilot bit from equipment
A to both directions of the loop. Equipment B chooses the time slot inforĆ
mation from the direction which contains an unchanged pilot bit. Usually,
the selected pilot bit is one of the vacant signalling bits along with its
"0"-state, since signalling is normally replaced by AIS in fault conditions
and thus the fault of the direction concerned will be detected at the receivĆ
ing station B. The pilot bit can be set at the interface unit (e.g. E&M bit c)
or it can be forced by so-called masking in the branching table (branchĆ
ing of type M). Thus, the pilot bits controlling the direction selection for
the opposite equipment B have to be transmitted from equipment A and
the pilots which control equipment A have to be sent from equipment B.
Example 1
Equipment A:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
Y3: 1 2 3 Rx1
Co1: D1 - TS1 - Bc - P0: +
Co2: D2 - TS2 - Bc - P0: -
M1: 1 xxxxxxxx-0xxx
M2: 2 xxxxxxxx-xxx0
MF
Equipment B:
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 19

Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3


Y3: 2 1 5 Rx2
Co1: D1 - TS2 - Bd - P0: -
Co2: D2 - TS1 - Ba - P0: +
M1: 2 xxxxxxxx-xx0x
M2: 1 xxxxxxxx-xx0x
MF
The condition selected at equipment A is the so-called default condition
(signalling bit c of the first channel in a time slot or a time slot group). At
equipment B, the conditions are defined separately: first the condition for
the lower direction number and then that for the higher. In both cases the
directions are of equal priority, i.e., the selected direction (Rx1 or Rx2) is
changed only if the condition of the selected direction enters the untrue
state (-) while the condition of the other direction is true (+).
The directions can also be provided with priorities, in which case the pilot
bit is sent to one direction only. The condition for the selections in the reĆ
ceive-end direction is then composed of the two different states of the
bit. The condition definition for the receive end is performed for the
lower one of the selectable directions, while the higher direction receives
the opposite state of the given condition. If e.g. direction 2 is to be proĆ
vided with a higher priority in Y3-type branching, the condition for diĆ
rection 1 should be defined as the "1"-state of the pilot bit received from
direction 2, which automatically assigns state "0" of the bit concerned as
the condition of direction 2.
Example 2
Equipment A:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
Y3: 1 2 3 Rx2
Co1: D2 - TS2 - Bd - P1: -
Co2: D2 - TS2 - Bd - P0: +
M2: 2 xxxxxxxx-xx0x
MF
Equipment B:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
Y3: 2 1 5 Rx1
Co1: D1 - TS2 - Bc - P0: +
Co2: D1 - TS2 - Bc - P1: -
M1: 2 xxxxxxxx-xxx0
MF
If the signalling or data bits of the channel to be connected cannot be used
as pilot conditions (all signalling bits are in use or multiframe is out of
use), one or more time slots of the system must be reserved as pilot chanĆ
nels. The pilot channel is connected at each equipment of the loop using
(e.g.) branching of type B0, and the connections of type M are set on top of
it as described above.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 20

7.6.2 Protection of common channels

Common channels can be protected in a loop network by using condiĆ


tional branching tables. It must be taken care that the channel is not conĆ
nected as a closed loop in any circumstances so as not to create circulaĆ
tion. In addition, especially the voice-frequency common channels
should always be terminated with a B-type branching.

2 B1 1

1 C 2

B2 Master B S0

2 1
A
S0
1 2

DB1386EA1

Figure 7a Protected common channel, no failures in the network

In each branching equipment, three branching tables are required to conĆ


nect the channel to a B1-, B2- or S0-type branching in different fault
conditions arising in the network.

In the example, no separate pilot bits are required for monitoring the netĆ
work status. Instead, the conditions used can be the state of the far-end
alarm bit (TS0/B3) and loop network control bit LCB (TS0/B5). The LCB
bit proceeds in 0-state from the interface 2 of the master equipment
through the network to the interface 1 of the master equipment if the netĆ
work does not contain faults requiring clock loopbacks (fault category
<3).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 21

Table examples in equipment A and B:

Table 10:
(permanent definitions)

Table 11:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
S0: 1-5 1-5 1-5
Prio1
(Co1 & Co2) & Co3
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co2: D2 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co3: True
MF

Table 12:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B1: 1-5 1-5
Prio2
(Co1 & Co2) & Co3
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co2: True
Co3: True
MF

Table 13:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B2: 1-5 1-5
Prio3
Always true
MF

Table examples in equipment C:

Table 10:
(permanent definitions)

Table 11:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B1: 1-5 1-5
Prio1
(Co1 + Co2) & Co3
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B5 - P0:
Co2: D2 - TS0 - B3 - P1:
Co3: True
MF
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 22

Table 12:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
S0: 1-5 1-5 1-5
Prio2
(Co1 & Co2) & Co3
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co2: D2 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co3: True
MF

Table 13:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B2: 1-5 1-5
Prio3
Always true
MF

Table examples in master equipment:

Table 10:
(permanent definitions)

Table 11:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B2: 1-5 1-5
Prio1
(Co1 + Co2) & Co3
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B3 - P1:
Co2: D1 - TS0 - B5 - P0:
Co3: True
MF

Table 12:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
S0: 1-5 1-5 1-5
Prio2
(Co1 & Co2) & Co3
Co1: D1 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co2: D2 - TS0 - B3 - P0:
Co3: True
MF

Table 13:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
B1: 1-5 1-5
Prio3
Always true
MF
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 23

The principle is that the channel is disconnected between the equipment


C and the master equipment if there are no faults in the network or if the
fault is on the section between the equipment in question. When the fault
is located elsewhere in the network, the equipment next to the faulty secĆ
tion connect the channel by B1- and B2-type branching, while the other
equipment use the S0-type branching.

2 1
S0
C
1 2

S0 Master B B2

2 A 1

1 B1 2

DB1387EA1

Figure 7b Protected common channel with a failure in the network

7.7 Protection of data channel

When a data channel operating with the TS0 sampling principle is to be


incorporated in a loop network, the loop of the data channel has to be disĆ
connected somewhere in order to disable circulation. The data channel
can be set off by a software setting. The Data channel protection is set ON
(6,1,9,1) at one (and only one!) equipment, while at others it is set OFF
(6,1,9,2). Disconnecting the loop when the network is in working order is
based on the "0"-states of the received LCB bits. If the loop includes bufĆ
fered slave stations, the ON setting has to be given at the first buffered
station in direction 1 of the Master equipment or at one of the equipment
preceding it.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation
II/3
6.3.1992 Page 24

7.8 Synchronization of a mesh network


A mesh network is synchronized by synchronizing the innermost loop in
the normal way: one of the stations is selected as the master and the others
serve as slaves. After this, the equipment of the chains to be added are
defined as slave stations and the TS0 bits B4 and B5 from direction 3 are
defined to be sent in permanent "0"-state from the basic loop at the juncĆ
tion equipment:
6,5,3,3,3,4 ; "MCB" = 0
6,5,3,3,3,5 ; "LCB" = 0
This way, the equipment at the junctions of the basic loop act together as
the master equipment of the added loop.

Master

2 1

1 2
TS0/B4 = 0 TS0/B4 = 0
TS0/B5 = 0 TS0/B5 = 0

3 loop 1 3

2 1

1 1 2 1

3
TS0/B4 = 0
loop 2 TS0/B5 = 0

2 2

1 2 loop 3

TS0/B4 = 0 3
TS0/B5 = 0

1 2

DB1388EA1

Figure 8 Synchronization of a mesh network


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 1

DB 2

2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT

Operation with Service Terminal

Contents

Page
1 SERVICE MENUS 3

2 GENERAL 19

3 SERVICE TERMINAL MAIN MENU 20

4 DB 2 EQUIPMENT MENUS 22
4.1 Fault display 22
4.2 Local alarm cancel 23
4.3 Reset local cancel 23
4.4 Identifications 24
4.5 Controls (temporary) 29
4.6 Settings (permanent) 37
4.7 Measurements 75
4.8 Statistics 76
4.9 Testing 79
4.10 User privileges 84 (85)

This description is related to the following programs starting from verĆ


sion 06B:

CSĂ24060 for Branching Unit B2 (DB 2B)


CSĂ24060.1 ----- " ------ (DB 2B-LP)
CSĂ24060.2 ----- " ------ (DB 2T)
CSĂ24060.3 ----- " ------ (DB 2P)
CSĂ24060.05 ----- " ------ (DB 2B-CD)
CSĂ24061 for Switching Unit X2 (DB 2B)
CSĂ24061.1 ----- " ------ (DB 2B-LP)
CSĂ24061.2 ----- " ------ (DB 2T)
CSĂ24061.3 ----- " ------ (DB 2P)
CSĂ24061.05 ----- " ------ (DB 2B-CD)

Prepared by Checked Approved Number


J. Kapanen/si DB200-0055-SEE2
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 2
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 3

1 SERVICE MENUS
1
DB 2 (OK)
MAIN LEVEL MENU 2
Done
TOP 3 Done

Identifications:
1 Equipment type SEE:
Select Operation: 2 Equipment ID
1 Fault display 3 User manual
4 4 Interface IDs
2 Local alarm cancel Page 4
5 HW-unit ID
3 Reset local cancel 6 Program ID
4 Identifications 7 Modify IDs
5 Controls (temporary) 9 Unit identifications
6 Settings (permanent)
7 Measurements Controls (temporary):
8 Statistics 0 Display
9 Testing 1 DB 2 to normal state
10 User privileges 2 Interface control Pages
5 3 Signal to MEAS-output
11 Miscellaneous 4 Forced indications 5-6
5 Forced alarm outputs
6 Read/Write TS
7 Read/Write SIG
8 Forced switching
9 Unit controls
Settings:
1 Service options
2 Equipment installation Pages
6 3 MUX-settings 7-14
4 Branching tables
5 2M interfaces
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults
7 Switching setting
8 Read/Save settings
9 Unit settings

7 Measurements: Page 15
1 Supply voltages
9 Unit measurements

Statistics:
8 1 2M signal quality Page 16
2 2M error counters
3 CPU reset counter
9 Unit statistics
Testings:
4 A/D-test
9 5 Memory tests
6 Memory operations Page 17
7 RUNTEST
9 Unit testing

User privileges:
10 1 Password for privileges Page 18
2 PIN for privileges
3 Cancel privileges
4 Setting parameters
11
* not yet implemented Miscellaneous*
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 4

IDENTIFICATIONS: Modify IDs and Unit identifications

4
Identifications:
1 Equipment type
2 Equipment ID
3 User manual
4 Interface IDs
5 HW-unit ID
6 Program ID
7 Modify IDs
9 Unit identifications

4,7 4,7,2 4,7,2,1


Modify IDs: Equipment ID: Give ID string:
2 Equipment ID 0 Display 1-15 characters
4 Interface IDs 1 Modify
5 HW-unit ID
4,7,4 d 1...3 4,7,4,d
Select direction: Interface IDs:
1, 2 or 3 0 Display own
1 Modify own
2 Display conn.
3 Modify conn.

4,7,4,d,1(or 3) 1, 3
Give ID string:
1-15 characters
4,7,5 4,7,5,1
HW-unit ID: 1 CC 24001
0 Display 2 CC 24002
1 Modify
4,7,5,1,1(or 2) 1, 2
Give .-version:
0-99

4,7,5,1,1(or 2),0-99
Give version:
3 characters
4,9 X2 4,9,2 4,9,2,7
Select unit: X2 identifications: HW-unit ID:
2 X2 3 User manual 0 Display
3... uP-units 5 HW-unit ID 1 Modify
6 Program ID 4,9,2,7,1
The menu is given 7 Modify HW-ID
by the chosen unit 0 CC 24010
1 CC 24011
4,9,2,7,1,0(or 1) 0, 1
Give .-version:
0-99
4,9,2,7,1,0(or 1),0-99
Give version:
3 characters
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 5

CONTROLS: B2 and X2 Unit controls


d
5 5,2 1...3 5,2,d
Controls (temporary): Select direction: Interface controls:
0 Display 1, 2 or 3 0 Display
1 DB 2 to normal state 1 To normal state
2 Interface controls 3 Loop to equipment
3 Signal to MEAS-output d
4 Forced indications 5,3 1...3 5,3,d
5 Forced alarm outputs
6 Read/Write TS Select direction: MEAS-output:
7 Read/Write SIG 1, 2 or 3 0 Display
8 Forced switching 1 Tx 2M data
9 Unit controls 5,4 2 Rx 2M data
3 Tx 2M CLK
Forced indications: 4 Rx 2M CLK
0 Display
1 Normal indic.
2 Forced red indic.
3 Forced yellow indic.
4 Forced no indic.
5,5 2...6 5,5,2-6
Forced alarm outputs: Alarm output state:
1 To normal states 0 Display
2 A-rack alarm 1 To normal state
3 B-rack alarm 2 Alarm
4 D-rack alarm 3 No alarm
5 PA1-alarm
6 PA2-alarm
5,8 1)

Forced switching:
0 Display
1 Normal
2 Forced IF 1
3 Forced IF 2
4 Toggle IF
d
5,8 2) 1...4 5,8,d
Select Tx dir: Forced switching:
11 I 0 Display
22 I 1 Normal
3 1 II 2 Forced IF I
4 2 II 3 Forced IF II
4 Toggle IF

5,9 X2 5,9,2
Select unit: X2 Controls:
2 X2 0 Display
3... uP-units 1 X2 to normal state
The menu is given 4 Forced indications
by the chosen unit
5,9,2,4
Forced indications:
0 Display
1 Normal indic.
2 Forced red indic.
1) only in program version T 3 Forced yellow indic.
2) only in program version P 4 Forced no indic.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 6

CONTROLS: TS data and Signalling data Read/Write


5
5,6,d,1 5,6,d,1,1 1-31
Controls (temporary): TS number?
0 Display 2M interface:
1 Read 1...31
1 DB 2 to normal state
2 Interface control 2 Write 5,6,d,1,2 1-31
3 Signal to MEAS-output
4 Forced indications TS number?
5 Forced alarm outputs 1...31
6 Read/Write TS 5,6,d,1,2,1-31
7 Read/Write SIG
8 Forced switching Bits value?
9 Unit controls 12345678
10101010 e.g.
1)
5,6 d 1...3 5,6,d
Select direction: TS data R/W:
1, 2 or 3 1 2M interface 5,6,d,2 5,6,d,2,1 1-31
2 X interface X interface: TS number?
3 Stop writing 1...31
1 Read
2 Write
5,6,d,2,2 1-31
TS number?
1...31
5,6,d,2,2,1-31
Bits value?
12345678
10101010 e.g.

1)
5,7 d 1...3 5,7,d 5,7,d,1 5,7,d,1,1 1-30
Select direction: Sig data R/W: 2M interface: Ch number?
1, 2 or 3 1 2M interface 1 Read 1...30
2 X interface 2 Write 5,7,d,1,2 1-30
3 Stop writing
Ch number?
1...30
5,7,d,1,2,1-30
Bits value?
abcd
0101 e.g.

5,7,d,2 5,7,d,2,1 1-30


X interface: Ch number?
1 Read 1...30
2 Write
5,7,d,2,2 1-30
Ch number?
1...30
5,7,d,2,2,1-30
Bits value?
1) Only directions1 and 2 in program version CD abcd
0101 e.g.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 7

SETTINGS: Service options


6 6,1,1
Settings: Baud rate:
1 Service options 0 Display
2 Equipment installation 75...9600
3 MUX-settings 6,1,2 6,1,2,1
4 Branching tables
5 2M interfaces Address: Address:
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults 0 Display 0...4095
7 Switching settings 1 Modify
8 Read/Save B2 settings
9 Unit settings 6,1,3
Rack alarm functions:
6,1 0 Display
1 Normal
Service options: 2 Alarms inhibited
1Baud rate 3 A replaced by B
2 Address
3 Rack alarm functions 6,1,4 6,1,4,1
4 Rack alarm delay Rack alarm delay: Delay?
5 PA1 function 0 Display 0...15 s
6 PA2 function 1 Modify
7 Control timeout
8 Data Hybrid configuration 6,1,5
9 B2 II addressable 1)
9 Data channel protection 2) PA1 function:
0 Display
1 A
2 B
3 D
4 S
5 A&S
6 A+B
7 A+B+S
8 X2 2)
9 X2+CH 2)
6,1,6
PA2 function:
0 Display
1 A
2 B
3 D
4 S
5 A&S
6 A+B
7 A+B+S
8 X2 2)
9 X2+CH 2)
6,1,7
Control timeout:
0 Display
1 ...65000 min
6,1,9 1) 6,1,8
B2 II addressable: Data Hybrid configuration:
0 Display 0 Display
1 ON 1 ON
2 OFF 2 OFF
6,1,9 2)
1) only in program version P
Data channel protection:
2) only in program versions LP and 0 Display
CD 1 ON
2 OFF
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 8

SETTINGS:
6 6,2 1, 2 6,2,1-2
Settings: Equipment installation: Give unit number:
1 Service options 0 Display 1 ... 20
2 Equipment installation 1 Add unit to bus
3 MUX-settings 2 Remove unit from bus
4 Branching tables 3 Install all
5 2M interfaces 4 Display TS allocation
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults
7 Switching settings 6,6 6,6,121
8 Read/Save B2 settings Are you sure?
9 Unit settings Done
121 Yes
6,7 1) and 6,7 2) 6,7,1
Switching settings: Done
0 Display
1 Set defaults 6,7,2
2 Change delay Change delay nx50 ms:
3 Priority n:1...40
0 Display
6,7,3 *
Priority:
0 Display
1 Equal
2 IF 1 higher
3 IF 2 higher
6,7,3 **
Priority:
0 Display
6,8 1 Equal
2 IF I higher
Read/Save: 3 IF II higher
0 Display ID 4 Equal, 1 -> DB 2T
1 Read settings 5 Equal, 2 -> DB 2T
2,<data> Save settings 6 Equal, 1&2 -> DB 2T
6,9 X2 6,9,2
Select unit: X2 settings:
2 X2 0 Display
3... uP-units 6 NOKIA defaults
7 Timeout for controls
8 Read/Save
6,9,2,6
Are you sure?
121 Yes
6,9,2,6,121
Done
6,9,2,7
Timeout for controls:
0 Display
1...65000 min
6,9,2,8
Read/Save:
1) only in program version T 0 Display ID
2) only in program version P 1 Read settings
2,<data> Save settings
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 9

SETTINGS: MUX settings


6
Settings:
1 Service options
2 Equipment installation
3 MUX-settings
4 Branching tables
5 2M interfaces
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults
7 Switching settings
8 Read/Save B2 settings
9 Unit settings

6,3 6,3,1 6,3,1,121


Are you sure? Done
MUX-settings: 121 Yes
0 Display
1 Set NOKIA defaults 6,3,2 1-3 6,3,2,1-3
2 Network timing
3 Synchr. output Network timing: Priority i timing:
4 Buffers 0 Display 0 Display
1-3 Priority 1-3 timing 7 *Slave LP 1)
4 Display MCB and LCB:s 1) 8 Master LP 1)
1 *Rx1 2M CLK
2 Rx2 2M CLK
3 Rx3 2M CLK
4 Sync. input
5 Internal timing
6,3,3 6,3,3,1
Syncr. output: Synchr. output:
1 Select CLK 0 Display
2 Fault masking 1 Rx1 2M CLK
2 Rx2 2M CLK
3 Rx3 2M CLK
4* MASTER CLK

6,3,3,2
Fault masking:
0 Display
1 In use
2 *Not used

6,3,4 6,3,4,5 2)

Frame buffers: Special connections:


0 Display 1 To normal state
11 2 No buffer 21 3 No buffer
21 2 Buffer 32 3 No buffer
32 1 Buffer 4 1/2 3 No buffer
41 2 Buffer 53 1&2 No buffer
5 Special connections 2) 63 1&2 No buffer

* default setting
1) only in program versions LP and CD
2) only in program version CD
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 10

SETTINGS: Branching tables (program versions B, -LP, -CD and P)


TS16 use (program version T)
6 6,4,0 6,4,1,t,1

Settings: Display table: Select type:


1 Service options 0 Active table 1 Bn Branching
2 Equipment installation 1,..,29 EEPROM-table 2 Cn Digital sum
3 MUX-settings 32,..,39 FIXED table 3 Sn Speech sum
4 Branching tables 99 Free space on EEPROM 4 Dn Fixed data
5 2M interfaces 5 Ln Loops
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults 6 Yn Cond. branch 2)
7 Switching settings 7 Mn Masked data 2)
8 Read/Save B2 settings 8 Tn Cond branch. 3)
9 Unit settings t See pages: 11-13
6,4,1 1-29 6,4,1,t,2-3
6,4 Edit table: Display/Delete line n:
Branching tables: 1,..,29 EEPROM table 1, 2, ...
0 Display
1 Edit 6,4,1,t 6,4,1,t,6
2 Activate Edit table: Table name:
3 List 0 Display table 0 Display
4 Delete 1 Add one line 1 Modify
5 Switching delay 2 Display one line 2 Delete
6 Table copying 3 Delete one line
4 Check table 6,4,1,t,6,1
6,4 1)
5 Activate table Give ASCII-name:
TS16 use: 6 Table name max 15 chars
0 Display 7 Conditions
1*MF 8 TS16 use 6,4,1,t,7
2 Data Table conditions:
0 Display
1,2,3 Give cond. 1,2,3
4 Relations of cond:s
5 Priority
6 Set conditionality
7 Remove conditionality

6,4,2 6,4,1,t,7,1-3
Activate table: Give condition:
0 Display as D-TS-B-P
1,..,29 EEPROM table D = 1-3 Rx dir.
32,..,39 Fixed table TS= 00-31 Rx TS
B = 1-8 for TS-bit or
6,4,4 A-D for MF-bit
P = 1/0 true pol.
Delete table: (or 0 = true)
1,..,29 EEPROM table
99 Delete all tables 6,4,1,t,7,4
6,4,5 Give relations of conditions:
1 Always True
Delay Nx100 ms: 2 (Co1&Co2)&Co3
N = 1,..,200 (0?) 3 (Co1+Co2)&Co3
4 (Co1+Co2)+Co3
6,4,6
6,4,1,t,7,5
Table copying: Give priority:
0 Display 1-8; 1 highest
1 230 (55 B copied)
2 113 (113 B copied) 6,4,1,t,8
TS16 use:
1) only in program version T 0 Display
2) only in versions LP and CD 1 MF
3) only in program version BP 2 Data
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 11

SETTINGS: Edit Branching tables: 6,4,1,t,1,1-3


6,4,1,t,1
Select type:
1 Bn Branching
2 Cn Digital sum
3 Sn Speech sum
4 Dn Fixed data
5 Ln Loops
6 Yn Cond. branch
7 Mn Masked data
8 Tn Cond. branch
6,4,1,t,1,1 0...2 6,4,1,t,1,1,0-2
Select: Give TS; Dir I:
0 B0: 1 2 i ; i = 1,,,31
1 B1: 1 3 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
2 B2: 2 3 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
i - 12345678; B1-8=1/0
Give TS; Dir m:
0 Same before
i (i = 1...31)
j-k ; j,k = 1...31
i.j.k ; MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
i (i = 1...31)

6,4,1,t,1,2 0...3 6,4,1,t,1,2,0-3


Select: Give TS; Dir I:
0 C0: Digit omnibus i ; i = 1...31
1 C1: 2 & 3 1, 1 2,3 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
2 C2: 1 & 3 2, 2 1,3 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
3 C3: 1 & 2 3, 3 1,2 p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
Give TS; Dir m (n):
0 Same before
i ; i = 1...31
j-k ; j,k = 1...31
i.j.k ; MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8

6,4,1,t,1,3 0...3 6,4,1,t,1,3,0-3


Select: Give TS; Dir I:
0 S0: Omnibus i ; i = 1...31
1 S1: 2 + 3 1, 1 2,3 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
2 S2: 1 + 3 2, 2 1,3 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
3 S3: 1 + 2 3, 3 1,2 Give TS; Dir m (n):
0 Same before
i (i = 1...31)
j-k ; j,k = 1...31
i.j.k ; MAX 5 TS
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 12

SETTINGS: Edit Branching tables: 6,4,1,t,1,4-5/8


6,4,1,t,1
Select type:
1 Bn Branching
2 Cn Digital sum
3 Sn Speech sum
4 Dn Fixed data
5 Ln Loops
6 Yn Cond. branch.
7 Mn Masked data
8 Tn Cond. branch. 1)

6,4,1,t,1,4 1...3 6,4,1,t,1,4,1-3


Select fixed data to: Give TS; Dir l:
1 D1 : 1 i ; i = 1...31
2 D2 : 2 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
3 D3 : 3 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8

Give databits:
12345678-abcd
11110000-1101
10101010

6,4,1,t,1,5 1...3 6,4,1,t,1,5,1-3


Select: Give TS; Dir l:
1 L1 : 1 1 i ; i = 1...31
2 L2 : 2 2 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
3 L3 : 3 3 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
6,4,1,t,1,8 1) r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
Select: Give TS; Dir l:
0 T0: 1 2 0 Same before
1 T1: 1 3 i (i = 1...31)
2 T2: 2 3
j-k ; j,k = 1...31
0...2
Give TS; Dir I: i.j.k ; MAX 5 TS
i ; i = 1...31
j-k ; j,k = 1...31 p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
Give TS; Dir m:
0 Same before Note! Operation of branching type T
i (i = 1...31) is described in the Operating
j-k ; j,k = 1...31 Handbook of the Branching
Repeater CA 24014.1.
i.j.k ; MAX 5 TS

p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4 Give cond.:


r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8 as D-TS-B-P
D = 1-3 Rx dir
i-r TS = 00-31 Rx TS
B = 1-8 for TS bit or
A-D for MF-bit
P = 1/0 true pol.
1) only in program version BP (or 0 "true")
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 13

SETTINGS: Edit Branching tables: 6,4,1,t,6-6,4,1,t,7


6,4,1,t,1
Select type:
1 Bn Branching
2 Cn Digital sum
3 Sn Speech sum
4 Dn Fixed data
5 Ln Loops
6 Yn Cond. branch. 1)
7 Mn Masked data 1)
8 Tn Cond. branch.
6,4,1,t,1,6 1) 6,4,1,t,1,6,1-3
1...3
Select: Give TS; Dir l:
1 Y1: 2 or 3 1:1 2&3 i ; i = 1...31
2 Y2: 1 or 3 2:2 1&3 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
3 Y3: 1 or 2 3;3 1&2 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
Give TS; Dir m(n):
0 Same before
i (i = 1...31)
j-k ; i,k = 1...31
i.j.k ; MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
i-r
Cond. type:
0 Default
1 Prior. switch
2 Equal switch
1, 2
Give condition:
as D-TS-B-P
D = 1-3 Rx dir
TS = 00-31 Rx TS
B = 1-8 for TS-bit or
A-D for MF-bit
P = 1/0 true pol.
(or 0 "true")

6,4,1,t,1,7 1) 1...3 6,4,1,t,1,7,1-3


Select masked data to: Give TS; Dir l:
1 M1: 1 i ; i = 1...31
2 M2: 2 j-k ; j,k = 1...31
3 M3: 3 i.j.k; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
i-r
Masked state:
0/1
0, 1
Masked bits as 1:
12345678-abcd
11110000-0001
1) only in program versions LP and CD 10101010
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 14

SETTINGS: 2M interface
6 6,5,d,1 6,5,d,1,121
Settings: Are yoy sure? Done
1 Service options 121 Yes
2 Equipment installation 6,5,d,3,1 1)
3 MUX-settings Data channel:
4 Branching tables 6,5,d,2 0 Display
5 2M interfaces CRC: 1 Not in use
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults 0 Display 2 Sampl. rate 4 kHz
7 Switching settings 1 *In use 3 *Sampl. rate 8 kHz
8 Read/Save B2 settings 2 Not in use 4 Sampl. rate 16 kHz
9 Unit settings
6,5,d,3 6,5,d,3,1
6,5 d 1...3 TS0 bits usage: Data channel:
0 Display 0 Display
Select direction 1, 2 or 3 1 Data channel 1 Not in use
2 *Fixed 1 2 Sampl. rate 4 kHZ
6,5,d 3 Fixed 0 3 Sampl. rate 8 kHz
4 MCB, Master Clk. Bit 1) 4 *Sample rate 16 kHz
2M/d settings:
0 Display 5 LCB, Loop Clk. Bit 1)
6,5,d,3,2-5
1 Set NOKIA defaults
2 Use of CRC Select bit:
3 Use of TS0 bits 4...8
4 Fault consequences 6,5,d,4 6,5,d,4,1
5 SWAIS
6 Use of 2M interf. Fault consequences: Error rate >1E-3
7 Use of MF 1 Error rate >1E-3 0 Display
8 BER-6 Alarm 2 Far-end alarm 1 *A+S+AIS+FEA
9 Signal of MEAS-output 3 AIS alarm 2 A alarm
10 TS16/MF bits 4 Fault in Tx 3 B alarm
4 No alarm
6,5,d,5
6,5,d,4,2
SWAIS:
0 Display FEA consequences:
1 *Enabled 0 Display
2 Disabled 1 *S alarm
2 B+S alarm
6,5,d,6 3 A+S alarm
Use of 2M: 6,5,d,4,3
0 Display
1 *Used AIS-alarm consequences:
2 Not used 0 Display
1 *S alarm
6,5,d,8 2 B+S alarm
BER-6 Alarm: 6,5,d,4,4
0 Display
1-254 sec. count time Fault in Tx:
255* disable alarm 0 Display
1 B-alarm
6,5,d,9 2 *No alarm
MEAS-output: 3 Not used
0 Display
1 *Tx 2M data
2 Rx 2M data
3 Tx 2M CLK
4 Rx 2M CLK
6,5,d,10 6,5,d,10,1-2
* default setting MF/F0 bits: Select bit:
1) only in program versions LP 0 Display 5, 7 or 8
1*Fixed 1
and CD 2 Fixed 0
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 15

MEASUREMENTS

7 7,1 7,1,1-2
Measurements: Voltage measurements: Supply voltage 5 V:
1 Supply voltages 1 Supply voltage +5 V 1 Display voltage (float)
9 Unit measurements 2 Supply voltage -5 V 2 Calibration

7,1,1-2,2
Give measured
supply voltage in mV
(without sign)

7,9 X2 7,9,2
Select unit: X2 measurements:
2 X2 1 Supply voltages
3... uP-units

7,9,2,1

Voltage measurements:
1 Supply voltage +5 V
2 Supply voltage -5 V

7,9,2,1,1-2

Supply voltage 5 V:
1 Display voltage (float)
2 Calibration

7,9,2,1,1-2,2

Give measured
supply voltage in mV
(without sign)
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 16

STATISTICS

8 8,1 d 1/2 8,1,d


Statistics: Select direction: 2M signal quality:
1 2M signal quality 1 or 2 1 Reset statistics
2 2M error conters 2 TT, AT, ES, SES, DM
3 CPU counters 3 Total time
9 Unit statistics 4 Available time
5 Err. secs.
6 Severely err. secs.
7 Degraded minutes
8 S (unav) /S (tot)
9 S (err) / S (ava)
10 S (sev) / S (ava)
11 M (degr) / M (ava)

8,2 d 1...3 8,2,d


Select direction: 2M error counters:
1, 2 or 3 0 Display all
2 Frame sync. losts
3 Errored framewords
4 Errored CRC-blocks
5 Reset counters

8,3
CPU reset counter:
0 Display
1 Reset

8,9 X2 8,9,2
Select unit: X2 statistics:
2 X2 3 CPU reset counter
3... uP-units

The menu is given 8,9,2,3


by the chosen unit
CPU reset counter:
0 Display
1 Reset
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 17

TESTING

9 9,5
Testing: Memory test:
4 A/D-test 1 RAM
2 EPROM
5 Memory test
6 Memory operations
7 RUNTEST
9 Unit testing 9,6 9,6,1 or 3
Memory operations: Give memory address:
1 Read byte 0...65535
2 Write byte in RAM
3 Read 8 bytes 9,6,2
4 Write byte in EEPROM
Give memory addr.:
0...65535
Give byte value:
0...255
9,6,4
Give EEPROM offset:
0...511
Give byte value:
0 ... 255
9,9 X2
The menu managing Select unit:
testing is given 2 X2
by the chosen unit 3... uP-units

9,9,2 9,9,2,5
X2 testing: Memory test:
4 A/D test 1 RAM
5 Memory test 2 EPROM
6 Memory operations
7 RUNTEST 9,9,2,6
Memory operations:
1 Read byte
2 Write byte in RAM
3 Read 8 bytes
4 Write byte in EEPROM

9,9,2,6,1 or 3
Give memory address:
0...65535
9,9,2,6,2
Give memory addr.:
0...65535
Give byte value:
0...255
9,9,2,6,4
Give EEPROM offset:
0...511
Give byte value:
0 ... 255
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 18

USER PRIVILEGES

10 10,1

User privileges: Give password:


1 Password for privileges 1...7 char
2 PIN for privileges
3 Cancel privileges 10,2
4 Setting parameters
Ground local PIN

10,4 10,4,1
Setting parameters: Timeout:
1 Timeout 0 Display
2 Protections 1...1000 min
3 Password
10,4,2
Protections:
0 Display
1 No protection
2 Password required
3 Local PIN required

10,4,3
Give password:
1...7 char
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 19

2 GENERAL
The DB 2 branching equipment is controlled by the Service Terminal, the
use of which is described in the Operating Handbook of Service Terminal
TC 21700. By means of the Service Terminal, the basic settings of the
equipment can be performed and stored into the nonvolatile storage (reĆ
places jumper settings), maintenance-related measures, e.g. loopbacks,
can be taken, and e.g. identifications, statistics, etc. can be read from the
equipment.

OFF ON

Select function:
1 Fault display
2 Local alarm cancel
3 Reset local cancel

F1 F2 F3 F4

MODE OBJ TOP UP

HELP >...

STO RCL DEF DATA


7 8 9 ASCII

D E F
4 5 6 INV

A B C
DEL
1 2 3

EXP . # AUTO
- 0 , RET

TS2105EA2

Figure 1 Service Terminal keys

Command parameter separator

The Service Terminal functions are menu-based. The menu levels can be
byĆpassed if the operator knows the required command sequences. The
<,> key is used as the command parameter separator. For example, if
<5,2,1,3> is given from the main level, the outgoing 2048 kbit/s signal of
the DB 2 interface 1 is looped back to the equipment, that is, equipment
loopback is performed on the interface 1.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 20

3 SERVICE TERMINAL MAIN MENU


When the Service Terminal is switched on, it shifts into mode Use of
equipment/Select operation, which is the factory setting. The main
menu common to all equipment, offered by the Service Terminal, is disĆ
played:

Select operation:
1 Fault display
2 Local alarm cancel
3 Reset local cancel
4 Identifications
5 Controls (temporary)
6 Settings (permanent)
7 Measurements
8 Statistics
9 Testing
10 User privileges
11 Miscellaneous*

1 Fault display

The fault display indicates the fault situation of the equipment. The fault
data indicates:

- equipment ID (e.g. DB 2 ABC)


- fault category (A, B, D, S or combination of these)
- monitoring block indicating the fault
- fault type.

The equipment ID is given by the operator in the Identifications menu.


The monitoring blocks of the DB 2 are units (B2 and X2), equipment inĆ
terfaces and any channel units that are used.

2 Local alarm cancel

In a fault situation, local alarm cancel removes rack alarms A and B. As a


reminder of cancelling, alarm D is given. Cancelling without a fault situĆ
ation produces also alarm B.

3 Reset local cancel

The normal situation is restored.

4 Identifications
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 21

Under this item, the equipment identifying data, such as equipment type,
the name given and the type and version of the program used, can be read.
Some of the identifications can be changed by the operator.

5 Controls (temporary)

Under this item, the controls are given that temporarily change the operĆ
ating mode of the equipment. Such controls are e.g. interface loopbacks.

6 Settings (permanent)

Settings determine the operating mode of the equipment. They are reĆ
tained in the equipment storage also during a power outage.

7 Measurements

Under this item, various measurements made by the equipment itself are
performed (without external measuring instruments).

8 Statistics

Reading and resetting of statistics maintained by the equipment itself.

9 Testing

Automatic tests performed by the equipment itself.

10 User privileges

The protective facilities of the equipment are under this item. Some of the
functions of the equipment (e.g. Settings) can be protected by providing
the program with a password that must be known if the protected funcĆ
tions are to be changed.

11 Miscellaneous

This item covers the functions unsuitable for other classification (not yet
in use).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 22

4 DB 2 EQUIPMENT MENUS
The DB 2 equipment is controlled via the service interface of the branchĆ
ing unit (B2). The B2 unit offers the menus related with the common secĆ
tion of the equipment, and via the menus offered by it the operator can
select the target unit for the measures taken.

The switching unit (X2) and each channel unit offer the menus required
for its control. In the menus following the main level, option number 9 is
reserved for unit selection.

4.1 Fault display

The B2 unit collects the fault data from the other units into a common
fault storage. In the initialization stage, the B2 unit collects from each unit
the fault related data: the faults existing in the unit, their effect on the
alarm outputs, the fault code related with each fault, how the fault is indiĆ
cated (colour of indicator) and name of the monitoring block. The B2 unit
generates a response to the fault inquiry. The response to the fault inquiry
includes the following data:

- equipment ID (equipment name)


- fault status
- fault data
- fault object
- fault type (fault code).

Example:

*DB 2B ABC (AS)


B2/2M1 unit 1:
- frame alignment lost
X2/2M3 unit 2:
- no incoming 2M sig.

The equipment has been provided with name DB 2B ABC and alarms A and
S are active in the equipment. The fault indications come from the equipment
interface 1 monitoring block (unit 1), the fault being loss of frame alignment,
and from the equipment interface 3 monitoring block (unit 2), the fault being
the missing incoming 2048 kbit/s signal. The B2 unit contains three monitorĆ
ing blocks: B2 (0) and equipment interfaces 1 (1) and 2 (2). The X2 unit has
two monitoring blocks: X2 (4) and equipment interface 3 (3).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 23

Faults of block B2

- Equipment reset
- Run diagnostic test
- Test mode
- Installation error
- Forced indication
- Forced control on

Faults of block X2

- Equipment reset
- Forced indication
- Run diagnostic test
- Sync. fault in clock recovery
- Sync. fault
- Installation error
- Forced control on
- Missing unit

Faults of interface blocks

- Incoming 2M missing
- AIS 2M
- Frame alignment lost
- CRC frame alignment lost
- Error ratio >1E-3
- Error ratio >1E-6
- Alarm from far end
- Equipment loopback
- Fault in Tx
- AIS TS16
- Multiframe alignment lost
- Alarm from far-end signalling equipment

The last three faults can occur only if channel-associated signalling is


used.

4.2 Local alarm cancel


In a fault situation, rack alarms A and B are cancelled by local alarm canĆ
cel. As a reminder of cancelling, alarm D is given. Unnecessary cancelling
produces also alarm B as an indication of abnormal operation. The local
alarm cancel function replaces the conventional acknowledgement
switch.

4.3 Reset local cancel


By reset local cancel, the normal alarm functions are restored after the
fault has been repaired.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 24

4.4 Identifications

Identifications:
1 Equipment type
2 Equipment ID
3 User manual
4 Interface IDs
5 HW-unit ID
6 Program ID
7 Modify IDs
9 Unit identifications

In the menu, options 1...6 give the equipment identifications that can be
changed via option 7. The X2 unit and channel unit identifications can be
accessed via option 9.

4,1 Equipment type

Fixed designation describing the equipment type, e.g. DB 2B.

4,2 Equipment ID

The equipment ID is an individual equipment name, given by the operĆ


ator, that can be used for network management. This designation is also
included in the fault display response. Response example:

DB 2B HEL 91

4,3 User manual

The document number of Operation with Service Terminal manual, reĆ


lated to the program; fixed. Response example:

DB200-0055-SEE
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 25

4,4 Interface IDs

Connection-specific identifications, given by the operator, that can be


used for network management. Response example:

1: HEL 91 -> ESP 10


2: HEL 91 -> KER 2
3: HEL 91 -> POR 7

4,5 HW-unit ID

Unit type designation and version symbol. Set at factory, but the operator
can change it e.g. in connection with repair. Response example:

CC 24001 04A

4,6 Program ID

Program type designation and version; fixed. Response example:

CS 24060 06A

4,7 Modify IDs

Modify IDs:
2 Equipment ID
4 Interface IDs
5 HW-unit ID

When option 2 is selected, the program displays a menu:

Equipment ID:
0 Display
1 Modify
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 26

Option 0 displays the designation and option 1 gives the text:

Give ID string:
1-15 characters

When option 4 (4,7,4) is selected, the following is displayed:

Select direction:
1, 2 or 3

When the direction has been selected, the following menu is displayed:

Interface IDs:
0 Display own
1 Modify own
2 Display conn.
3 Modify conn.

Options 0 and 2 display the designation, options 1 and 3 display the folĆ
lowing text:

Give ID string:
1-15 characters

When option 5 (4,7,5) is selected, the following is displayed:

HW-unit ID:
0 Display
1 Modify

Option 0 displays the type designation and version, and option 1 displays
the menu:

1 CC 24001
2 CC 24002

After the type designation has been selected, the version symbol and
.-version are given.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 27

4,9 Unit identifications

Under this option, the identifications of the X2 unit or a channel unit can
be selected as the object.

4,9,2 X2 Identifications

X2 Identifications:
3 User manual
5 HW-unit ID
6 Program ID
7 Modify HW-ID

4,9,2,3 User manual

The document number of Operation with Service Terminal manual, relatĆ


ing to the program; fixed. Response example:

DB200-0055-SEE

4,9,2,5 HW-unit ID

Unit type designation and version symbol. Response example:

CC 24010 04A

4,9,2,6 Program ID

Program type designation and version; fixed. Response example:

CS 24061 06A
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 28

4,9,2,7 Modify HW-ID

HW-unit ID:
0 Display
1 Modify

Option 0 displays the type designation and version, and option 1 displays
the following menu:

0 CC 24010
1 CC 24011

After the type designation has been selected, the version symbol and
.-version are given.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 29

4.5 Controls

Controls (temporary):
0 Display
1 DB 2 to normal state
2 Interface controls
3 Signal to MEAS-output
4 Forced indications
5 Forced alarm outputs
6 Read/Write TS
7 Read/Write SIG
8 Forced switching
9 Unit controls

The controls, with the exception of option Signal to MEAS output, are
provided with a time-out. A B-alarm is usually on and the yellow service
LED is lit when the controls are active.

5,0 Display

This option displays all active controls of the B2 unit. Response example:

Active controls:
2M1 Loop to eq.

When no controls have been performed, the response Normal is obĆ


tained.

5,1 DB 2 to normal state

Forces all controls of the DB 2 equipment to normal state (cancels also


channel unit controls).

5,2 2M Interface control

By Interface controls option, the 2M interfaces of the DB 2 unit are seĆ


lected as the object. The following is displayed:

Select direction:
1, 2 or 3
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 30

When the direction has been selected, the following menu is displayed:

Interface controls:
0 Display
1 To normal state
3 Loop to equipment

Option 0 displays the interface status of the direction in question.

Option 1 restores normal state in the interface.

By equipment loopback (option 3) the Tx signal of the equipment is


looped back to the equipment. The 2M AIS is connected to the interface
output to indicate loopback and alarm AS is activated.

5,3 Signal to MEAS output

Under this option, the signal to the measurement connectors of the DB 2


equipment units can be selected.

Select direction:
1, 2 or 3

Functions following selection of direction 1 or 2 are directed to the B2 unit


and its MEAS output. Functions after selection 3 are directed to the X2
unit MEAS output.

MEAS-output:
0 Display
1 Tx 2M data
2 Rx 2M data
3 Tx 2M CLK
4 Rx 2M CLK

Option 0 displays the current selection.

The transmitted 2048 kbit/s signal is connected to the MEAS interface by


option 1.

The received 2048 kbit/s signal is connected to the MEAS interface by opĆ
tion 2.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 31

The Tx direction clock, nominal frequency 2048 kHz, can be measured


from the interface by option 3.

The clock generated from the received signal is connected to the MEAS
interface by option 4.

5,4 Forced indications

Forced indications:
0 Display
1 Normal indic.
2 Forced red indic.
3 Forced yellow indic.
4 Forced no indic.

Option 0 (5,4,0) displays the forced indication selected for the B2 unit.
Option 1 (5,4,1) cancels the forced controls of indicators. The indications
are determined by fault situations.

Option 2 (5,4,2) blinks the red service LED, activates alarm B and proĆ
vides fault data of forced fault indication.

Option 3 (5,4,3) blinks the yellow service LED, activates alarm B and proĆ
vides fault data of forced indication.

Option 4 (5,4,4) sets the indicators off (however, the green service LED is
lit if the equipment is connected to the Service Terminal), activates alarm
B and provides fault data of forced indication.

5,5 Forced alarm outputs

Forced alarm outputs:


1 To normal states
2 A-rack alarm
3 B-rack alarm
4 D-rack alarm
5 PA1-alarm
6 PA2-alarm

Option 1 (5,5,1) cancels the forced controls. The states of the outputs are
determined by the fault situation.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 32

Options 2...6 display the following menu:

Alarm output state:


0 Display
1 To normal state
2 Alarm
3 No alarm

Option 0 (5,5,2-6,0) displays the state of the selected alarm output.

Option 1 (5,5,2-6,1) restores normal operation in the equipment.

Option 2 (5,5,2-6,2) forces the alarm output into alarm state and actiĆ
vates the B-alarm and the yellow service LED.

Option 3 (5,5,2-6,3) forces the active alarm output out of alarm state and
activates the B-alarm and the yellow service LED.

5,6 TS data R/W

Under this option it is possible to read and write time slot data in both 2M
interface and X interface direction.

Select direction:
1, 2 or 3

Note! In the DB 2B-CD program version, only direction 1 or 2 can be


chosen. After the direction has been selected, the following menu is disĆ
played:

TS data R/W:
1 2M interface
2 X interface
3 Stop writing

Option 1 (5,6,d,1) makes it possible to read time slot data entering from
direction d and write a fixed bit pattern into the time slot leaving for direcĆ
tion d.
Option 2 (5,6,d,2) directs the corresponding functions to the X-interface
of direction d.

By option 3 (5,6,d,3) the time slot writing is stopped.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 33

After option 1/2 the following menu is displayed:

2M interface:
1 Read
2 Write

After option 1 (5,6,d,1/2,1) the time slot (1...31), whose current contents
are to be read, is entered. The contents are displayed in binary format.

After option 2 the time slot number and the bit pattern to be written are
entered in the form 11001010 (B1-B8, 8 characters, 1 or 0).

5,7 Signalling data Read/Write

The functions under this option are the same as the ones under the previĆ
ous option (5,6), except that channel numbers 1...30 are dealt with instead
of time slots and the bit pattern is of the form 1011 (4 characters) when the
write option is selected.

5,8 Forced switching (program version T)

Under this option, it is possible to display and change the position of the
switch. After each option, the current position of the switch is displayed in
graphic form (i.e., whether the incoming signal selected to be sent to inĆ
terface 3 is coming from interface 1 or 2), and the forced control status if
such control is used.

Forced switching:
0 Display
1 Normal
2 Forced IF 1
3 Forced IF 2
4 Toggle IF

Option 0 (5,8,0) displays the position of the switch and the selected forced
control (options 2 and 3).
Option 1 (5,8,1) restores the switch to normal state, i.e., cancels the opĆ
tions 2 and 3.
Option 2 (5,8,2) forces the signal from direction 1; position of the switch
and the message of forced control are displayed.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 34

Option 3 (5,8,3) forces the Rx signal of direction 2 to the output of direcĆ


tion 3.
Option 4 (5,8,4) changes the position of the switch; the new position is
also displayed. If the switch has been forced, the active forced control is
cancelled.

5,8 Forced switching (program version P)

Under this option, the Rx signals to be sent to different interfaces can be


displayed and forced.

Select Tx dir:
11 I
22 I
31 II
42 II

Option 1 (5,8,1) directs the following operations to interface 1 in equipĆ


ment I, option 2 (5,8,2) to interface 2 in equipment I, option 3 (5,8,3) to
interface 1 in equipment II, and option 4 (5,8,4) to interface 2 in equipĆ
ment II.

Forced switching:
0 Display
1 Normal
2 Forced IF I
3 Forced IF II
4 Toggle IF

Option 0 (5,8,d,0) displays the position of the switch and the selected
forced control (options 2 and 3).
Option 1 (5,8,d,1) restores the switch to normal state, i.e., cancels the opĆ
tions 2 and 3.

Option 2 (5,8,d,2) forces the signal from equipment I; position of the


switch and a message of forced control are displayed.

Option 3 (5,8,d,3) forces the Rx signal of equipment II to the output.

Option 4 (5,8,d,4) changes the position of the switch; the new position is
also displayed. If the switch has been forced, the active forced control is
cancelled.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 35

5,9 Unit controls

Under this option, the X2 unit or a channel unit of the DB 2 equipment


can be selected as the object of controls. Option (5,9) gives as a response
the text for unit selection:

Select unit:
2 X2
3... uP-units

5,9,2 X2 Controls

X2 Controls:
0 Display
1 X2 to normal state
4 Forced indications

5,9,2,0 Display

This option displays all active controls performed on the X2 unit. ReĆ
sponse example:

Active controls:
2M Loop to eq.

When no controls are valid, the response is:

Normal

5,9,2,1 X2 to normal state

Forces all controls of the X2 unit to normal state.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 36

5,9,2,4 Forced indications

Forced indications:
0 Display
1 Normal indic.
2 Forced red indic.
3 Forced yellow indic.
4 Forced no indic.

The effects of options are the same as under option 5,4.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 37

4.6 Settings (permanent)

Settings determine the operating mode of the equipment. They are mainĆ
tained also during a power outage. The settings can be accessed by selectĆ
ing item 6 from the main menu whereby the following menu is obtained:

Settings:
1 Service options
2 Equipment installation
3 MUX-settings
4 Branching tables
5 2M interfaces
6 DB 2 to NOKIA defaults
7 Switching settings
8 Read/Save B2 settings
9 Unit settings

Service options affect the service characteristics of the equipment, equipĆ


ment installation defines the equipment configuration of the DB 2 equipĆ
ment and MUX settings define the timing mode of the equipment.
Branching tables determine the connection of channels between different
transmission directions and unit settings set the operating mode for the
X2 unit and for any channel units that are included in the configuration.

6,1 Service options

Service options:
1 Baud rate
2 Address
3 Rack alarm functions
4 Rack alarm delay
5 PA1 function
6 PA2 function
7 Control timeout
8 Data Hybrid configuration
9 B2 II addressable
9 Data channel protection
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 38

6,1,1 Baud rate

The baud rate of the traffic between the Service Terminal and the equipĆ
ment is set to the suitable value (factory setting 9600).

Baud rate:
0 Display
75...9600

Option 0 (6,1,1,0) displays the selected baud rate. The baud rate (bit/s) is
selected in the given range. Response example:

9600

6,1,2 Address

The equipment is provided with an individual address. This address is


used when the equipment is connected to a bus together with other equipĆ
ment. The factory setting for the address is 1. In addition to the individual
address, the common address 4095 can be used which makes it possible to
address all equipment simultaneously.

Address:
0 Display
1 Modify

When 0 (6,1,2,0) is selected, the program responds by displaying the adĆ


dress selected for the equipment, e.g. 101.

By selecting option 1 (6,1,2,1), the menu for the address selection is obĆ
tained:

Address:
0...4095
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 39

6,1,3 Rack alarm functions

Under this option, the operating mode for rack alarms is selected:

Rack alarm functions:


0 Display
1 Normal
2 Alarms inhibited
3 A replaced by B

Option 0 (6,1,3,0) displays the rack alarm mode that is currently active.
Response example:

Normal

By option 1 (6,1,3,1), alarm mode Normal is selected (factory setting).

Option 2 (6,1,3,2) is used when rack alarms are to be totally disabled, e.g.
during installation.

By option 3 (6,1,3,3) urgent A-alarms are changed to less urgent B-


alarms. This mode can be used for example during the trial operation
stage of the equipment.

6,1,4 Rack alarm delay

With this option, the time constant for rack alarm filtering is selected. The
rack alarm becomes active when the alarm situation has continued for the
time set. The rack alarm is cancelled when the normal state has continued
for the time set to the alarm in question.
In a changing alarm situation, the time counter is accumulated always
during an alarm. When the alarm is off, the counter reading is retained. If
the normal state continues for the time defined by the time constant, the
counter is reset and time counting is restarted. Thus, the alarm becomes
active when the alarm situation has lasted, continuously or not, for the
time set.

Rack alarm delay:


0 Display
1 Modify

Option 0 (6,1,4,0) displays the duration of the rack alarm delay set, reĆ
sponse example: 3 seconds.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 40

By selecting option 1 (6,1,4,1) the text for selecting the rack alarm delay is
displayed:

Delay: 0...15 s

The factory setting is 3 seconds.

6,1,5 PA1 function

The alarm or fault that activates the programmable alarm output PA1 is
selected here. The output is also active whenever the power supply of the
B2 unit fails.

PA1 function:
0 Display
1A
2B
3D
4S
5A&S
6A+B
7A+B+S
8 X2
9 X2 + CH

Option 0 (6,1,5,0) displays the alarm selected.

When option 1, 2, 3 or 4 is selected, the output is activated by alarm A (facĆ


tory setting), B, D or S, respectively.

When option 5 (6,1,5,5) is selected, combined alarm A&S activates the


output: both alarm A and alarm S must be active simultaneously. When
this option is selected, the output is active when a serious fault inhibiting
operation has been detected in the equipment.

When option 6 (6,1,5,6) is selected, the output is activated whenever a


fault is detected in the equipment.

When option 7 (6,1,5,7) is selected, the output is activated always in a


fault situation (also when the fault is detected elsewhere, e.g. AIS).

Options 8 and 9 are available in program versions LP and CD only.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 41

When option 8 (6,1,5,8) is selected, the output is activated if a fault (e.g.


table fault) has been detected by the DB 2 equipment itself or if the X2
unit is missing from the configuration (no connection).
When option 9 (6,1,5,9) is selected, the output is activated by the same
situations as with option 8, but the activation can also be caused by a misĆ
sing channel unit (no connection).

6,1,6 PA2 function

The alarm or fault that activates the programmable alarm output PA2 is
selected here. Operation of the output is similar to that of the PA1, with
the exception that the PA2 is not activated by a failure in the operation of
the B2 unit power supply.

PA2 function:
0 Display
1A
2B
3D
4S
5A&S
6A+B
7A+B+S
8 X2
9 X2 + CH

Option 0 (6,1,6,0) displays the alarm selected. When option 1, 2, 3 or 4 is


selected, the output is activated by alarm A (factory setting), B, D or S,
respectively.
When option 5 (6,1,6,5) is selected, combined alarm A&S activates the
output: both alarm A and alarm S must be active simultaneously. When
this option is selected, the output is active when a serious fault inhibiting
operation has been detected in the equipment.

When option 6 (6,1,6,6) is selected, the output is activated whenever a


fault is detected in the equipment.

When option 7 (6,1,6,7) is selected, the output is activated always in a


fault situation (also when the fault is detected elsewhere, e.g. AIS).

Options 8 and 9 are available in program versions LP and CD only.

When option 8 (6,1,6,8) is selected, the output is activated if a fault (e.g.


table fault) has been detected by the DB 2 equipment itself or if the X2
unit is missing from the configuration (no connection).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 42

When option 9 (6,1,6,9) is selected, the output is activated by the same


situations as with option 8, but the activation can also be caused by a misĆ
sing channel unit (no connection).

6,1,7 Control timeout

With this option, the length of time for the controls to remain active is seĆ
lected. Default setting 10 minutes.

Control timeout:
0 Display
1...65000 min.

Option 0 (6,1,7,0) displays the time-out selected for the controls. Other
selections within the allowable range set the time-out (minutes).

6,1,8 Data hybrid configuration

By means of the data hybrid it is possible to combine the data of the serĆ
vice interface and data channels of the DB 2 equipment.

Data Hybrid configuration:


0 Display
1 ON
2 OFF

Option 0 (6,1,8,0) displays whether the data hybrid is on or off.


By option 1 (6,1,8,2), the service interface and data channel are conĆ
nected to each other. When the data hybrid is on, the transmission manĆ
agement data from the data channel is controlled to the processor of the
equipment and to the service interface output which is constantly active.
Option 2 (6,1,8,2) deactivates the connection between the service interfaĆ
ce and data channel. The equipment can be accessed only via the service
interface, and its output is active only when the equipment responds to
transmission management polling (factory setting).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 43

6,1,9 Data channel protection


(program versions LP and CD)
This option makes it possible to protect the data channel in loop netĆ
works. The protection is activated at one station of each partial loop. The
data channel is disconnected by the software at the station concerned if
the loop network control bit LCB received from directions 1 and 2 is zero.

Data channel protection:


0 Display
1 ON
2 OFF

Option 0 (6,1,9,0) displays whether the data channel protection is on or


off.
Option 1 (6,1,9,1) sets data channel protection on. The option has to be
selected at a station which receives the LCB bits from directions 1 and 2 in
state 0 when there are no failures in the network. If the network contains
only unbuffered (6,3,4,1) Slave stations, any of the stations can be used. If
the network contains also buffered Slave stations, the option must be seĆ
lected before or at the first buffered equipment in the direction 2 of the
Master equipment.
Option 2 (6,1,9,2) sets the data channel protection off (factory setting).

6,1,9 B2 II addressable (program version P)


This option defines the service connection for the II equipment of the DB
2P equipment.

B2 II addressable:
0 Display
1 ON
2 OFF

Option 0 (6,1,9,0) displays whether the function is used or not.


Option 1 (6,1,9,1) is selected when a service connection is wanted also to
the protecting equipment (II).
Option 2 (6,1,9,2), together with option 6,1,8,2, disconnects the service
connection to the II equipment (no double alarms) and releases the adĆ
dress used by it (address of equipment I + 1) for other use (factory setĆ
ting). This option has to be selected before the command Search EquipĆ
ment is given with the DB 2 Manager.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 44

6,2 Equipment installation

Equipment installation:
0 Display
1 Add unit to bus
2 Remove unit from bus
3 Install all
4 Display TS allocation

Option 0 (6,2,0) displays the equipment configuration and indicates


which unit (abbreviation of the name of the unit) is in which location (unit
number 1...20).

The red service LED is lit in units that have been inserted in the equipĆ
ment cartridge but have not been installed.

By options 1 and 2, units can be added to or removed from the bus one by
one.

Give unit number:


1...20

By option 3 (6,2,3), all units included in the configuration at the moment


are installed at the same time.

Option 4 (6,2,4) displays which time slot of the internal bus is allocated to
which unit.

6,3 MUX-settings

MUX-settings:
0 Display
1 Set NOKIA defaults
2 Network timing
3 Synchr. output
4 Buffers
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 45

6,3,1 Set NOKIA defaults

Those default settings included in option 6,6 that concern the MUX setĆ
tings can be set by Set NOKIA defaults. After the option has been seĆ
lected, the program displays a menu prompting for confirmation:

Are you sure?


121 Yes

Option 121 (6,3,1,121) activates the default settings. If no activation is


really wanted, exit from the menu by pressing the UP or TOP key.

6,3,2 Network timing (program versions B, T, and P)

Network timing:
0 Display
1-3 Priority 1-3 timing

By option 0 (6,3,2,0) the selected timing sources and the timing source
currently in use are displayed.

By options 1-3, that correspond to priorities 1-3, the user can set prioĆ
rities for the timing sources. After the selection, a menu will be displayed:

Priority i timing:
0 Display
1 *Rx1 2M CLK
2 Rx2 2M CLK
3 Rx3 2M CLK
4 Sync. input
5 Internal timing

Priorities (1 to 3) can be given to three timing sources. In addition to these


definitions, the internal timing will get the priority 4, unless not given a
higher priority. The internal timing will always have the lowest priority.
Option 1 (6,3,2,p,1) sets a priority to the clock received from direction 1,
option 2 (6,3,2,p,2) to the clock received from direction 2, and option 3
(6,3,2,p,3) to the clock received from direction 3.
Option 4 (6,3,2,p,4) sets a priority to the clock brought to the X2 unit synĆ
chronization interface.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 46

The clock in free oscillation of the equipment oscillator can be given a


priority by option 5 (6,3,2,p,5).
The internal oscillator of the equipment will automatically lock to the
Master timing source. The Master timing source is the clock (in operĆ
ation) that has the highest (=1st) priority.
As a default setting, the clock coming from direction 1 has priority 1 and
the internal oscillator has priority 2.

6,3,2 Network timing (Program versions -LP and -CD)

Network timing:
0 Display
1-3 Priority 1-3 timing
4 Display MCB and LCB:s

By option 0 (6,3,2,0), the timing sources selected and the timing source
currently in use are displayed.
Option 4 (6,3,2,4) displays the states of both the incoming and the outgoĆ
ing MCB and LCB bits.

With options 1-3, a priority (1-3) can be set for the different timing
sources. The following menu is displayed after the selection:

Priority i timing:
0 Display
7*Slave LP
8 Master LP
1 Rx1 2M CLK
2 Rx2 2M CLK
3 Rx3 2M CLK
4 Sync. input (X2)
5 Internal timing

Three priorities (1-3) can be defined for timing sources. In addition to


these, the internal timing obtains priority 4, if it has not been defined
higher. Other timing sources cannot be defined lower than the internal
timing.

At the master station of the loop network, priority 1 is set for the Master
LP (6,3,2,1,8), and the actual timing sources are given the lower priorities.
At the slave stations, priority 1 is given to the Slave LP (6,3,2,1,7).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 47

Option 7 (6,3,2,1,7) sets the equipment to function as a slave station of the


loop network. In this case, the equipment selects the Master clock by
means of the TS0 loop control bits MCB and LCB (Rx1, Rx2, or internal),
and sends the control bits further as defined by the current situation in the
network.

Option 8 (6,3,2,1,8) sets the equipment to function as the master station


of the loop network. The actual timing sources, which can be options 3,4,
and 5, are given the lower priorities. The master station of the network
sends the loop network control bits MCB and LCB in 0-state.

Option 1 (6,3,2,p,1) sets a priority for the clock coming from direction 1,
option 2 (6,3,2,p,2) for the clock coming from direction 2, and option 3
(6,3,2,p,3) for the clock of direction 3.

A priority is set for the clock brought to the synchronization input (on the
X2 unit) by selecting option 4 (6,3,2,p,4).

The internal oscillator locks to the Master timing source which is autoĆ
matically the clock with the highest priority in operation.

Slave LP (6,3,2,1,7) is the default setting.

6,3,3 Synchronization output signal

Synchr. output:
1 Select CLK
2 Fault masking
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 48

6,3,3,1 Synchronization output

The signal to the synchronization output of the X2 unit is selected via this
menu:

Synchr. output:
0 Display
1 Rx1 2M CLK
2 Rx2 2M CLK
3 Rx3 2M CLK
4 *Master CLK

Option 0 (6,3,3,1,0) displays the clock signal connected to the synchronizĆ


ation output.

Options 1-3 connect the Rx clock of the direction (1-3) to the output.

Option 4 (6,3,3,1,4) connects the master clock, i.e. the internal oscillator
output, to the synchronization output.

6,3,3,2 Fault masking

The signal chosen to the synchronization output can be defined to be disĆ


connected in case of a fault situation via this menu: by options Rx1-Rx3,
the fault category being >3 (-LP: >2), and by option Master CLK when
all incoming clocks that have been provided with priorities are faulty.

Fault masking:
0 Display
1 In use
2 *Not used

Option 0 (6,3,3,2,0) displays whether the synchronization signal is set to


be disconnected.

Option 1 (6,3,3,2,1) activates the disconnection in fault situations.

When option 2 (6,3,3,2,2) is in effect, the synchronization output signal is


not disconnected in a fault situation, but the Master CLK is connected to
it.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 49

6,3,4 Buffers

Under this option, the main branch (1<-->2) timing mode (frame bufĆ
fering/unbuffered) is selected. Direction 3 (1<-->3 and 2<-->3) is
always buffered in other than the DB 2B-CD equipment.

Frame buffers:
0 Display
1 1<--->2 No buffer
2 1<--->2 Buffer
3 2 --->1 Buffer
4 1 --->2 Buffer
5 Special connections

Option 0 (6,3,4,0) displays the main branch timing mode and, in the DB
2B-CD equipment, also the timing mode of direction 3.

Option 1 (6,3,4,1) controls the main branch into unbuffered timing mode,
i.e. the clock and the frame phase are connected directly through between
interfaces 1 and 2.

Option 2 (6,3,4,2) sets on the frame buffer on the main branch, i.e. the
signal is sent from the interfaces in phase with master timing.

Option 3 (6,3,4,3) sets on the frame buffer on the main branch only in diĆ
rection 2-->1.

Option 4 (6,3,4,4) sets on the frame buffer on the main branch only in diĆ
rection 1-->2.

Option 5 (6,3,4,5) displays a menu controlling the constant delay connecĆ


tion (only in CD program version):

Special connections:
1 To normal state
2 1 --->3 No buffer
3 2 --->3 No buffer
4 1/2 --->3 No buffer
5 3 --->1&2 No buffer
6 3<--->1&2 No buffer

Option 1 (6,3,4,5,1) eliminates the effect of special connections and sets


the timing mode of the equipment to the default setting.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 50

When option 2 (6,3,4,5,2) is selected, the Rx clock of interface 1 and the


frame phase are connected to the output of interface 3 (1-->3 no
buffer). The main branch (1<-->2) is unbuffered and the other
branches are buffered.
Option 3 (6,3,4,5,3) sets the branch 2-->3 unbuffered. The main
branch is unbuffered and the other branches are buffered.
Option 4 (6,3,4,5,4) enables unbuffered, conditional operation from diĆ
rection 1 or 2 to direction 3. The operation is the same as with options 2
and 3 but the active direction is determined by the received LCB bits (0 =
True), i.e., the directions are equal. This facility is used in Slave equipĆ
ment (n pcs) of the unidirectional constant-delay network.
Option 5 (6,3,4,5,5) sets the branches from direction 3 to directions 1 and
2 to unbuffered mode. The other branches are buffered. The facility is
used in the Master equipment (1 pc) of a unidirectional constant-delay
network.
Option 6 (6,3,4,5,6) creates a combination of options 4 and 5: an unbufĆ
fered connection from direction 1 or 2 to direction 3 and an unbuffered
connection from direction 3 to directions 1 and 2. The other branches are
buffered. The facility is used in the Master (1 pc) and Slave equipment (1
pc) of a bidirectional constant-delay network.

6,4 TS16 use (program version T)


Under this option it is defined whether TS16 is used for channel-assoĆ
ciated signalling or released for data use.

TS16 use:
0 Display
1*MF
2 Data

6,4 Branching tables


(program versions B, -LP, -CD and P)

Branching tables:
0 Display
1 Edit
2 Activate
3 List
4 Delete
5 Switching delay
6 Table copying
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 51

6,4,0 Display table

Display table:
0 Active table
1,...,29 EEPROM table
32,...,39 FIXED table
99 Free space on EEPROM

The table to be displayed is selected. Option 0 displays the active table.


Options 1-29 display an operator-defined table 1-29, which is stored
on the EEPROM. Options 32-39 (in the DB 2B equipment options
32-42) display a table permanently defined on the EPROM.

If the selected table is active when it is displayed, the text (active) appears
above the table.

Selection t (6,4,0,t) displays the definitions of the selected table t. ReĆ


sponse example:

1: (active)
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3 (line-no)
B1: 1-15 1-15 (1)
B2: 1-15 17-31 (2)

The connections defined by table 1 are thus: time slots 1-15 of direction 1
are branched into direction 3 as time slots 1-15 and time slots 1-15 of
direction 2 are branched into direction 3 as time slots 17-31.

6,4,1 Edit table

The operator selects the table to be edited:

Edit table:
1,..., 29 EEPROM table

By selection t (6,4,1,t), the program displays a menu where various operĆ


ations for table t can be selected.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 52

Edit table:
0 Display table
1 Add one line
2 Display one line
3 Delete one line
4 Check table
5 Activate table
6 Table name
7 Conditions
8 TS16 use

Option 0 (6,4,1,t,0) is as option 6,4,0,t above.

By option 1 (6,4,1,t,1), an addition is made to the table.

By option 2,l (6,4,4,t,2,l), definition line l of table t is displayed.

By option 3,l (6,4,1,t,3,l), the definition line l of table t is deleted from the
storage.

By option 4 (6,4,1,t,4), the correctness of definition lines in table t is


checked.

Option 5 (6,4,1,t,5) activates table t.

Option 6 (6,4,1,t,6) displays the menu where the name of table t can be
displayed or modified.

After selection of option 7 (6,4,1,t,7), conditions can be set for the table
activation.

Option 8 (6,4,1,t,8) defines whether the multiframe is in use or not in use


when table t is active.

In addition, by option l (6,4,1,t,l; l  10), the table definitions are disĆ


played from line l onwards. This option is used when, due to the great size
of the table, option 0 does not make it possible to display all of the definiĆ
tion lines (Break).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 53

6,4,1,t,1 Add one line


In this menu, the type of branching (bt) is selected.

Select type:
1 Bn Branching
2 Cn Digital sum
3 Sn Speech sum
4 Dn Fixed data
5 Ln Loops
6 Yn Cond. branch
7 Mn Masked data
8 Tn Cond. branch.

Note! Branching types Y and M are available in program versions LP and


CD only. Branching type T is included in the program version BP only and
its operation is described in the Operating Handbook of the Branching
Repeater (CA 24014.1).
Selection bt (6,4,1,t,1,bt) displays a branching type focusing (btf) inquiry
where the number of the option directly correlates with the number reĆ
lated to the branching type marking in question. As a sample display, the
menu after branching selection (bt = 1).

Select:
0 B0: 1 <---> 2
1 B1: 1 <---> 3
2 B2: 2 <---> 3

Selection btf (6,4,1,t,1,bt,btf) leads to a menu where the connection mode


of time slots to be branched in the way defined above is prompted for.
As a sample display, the menu belonging to branching type Bn
(btf = 1):

Give TS; Dir 1:


i ; i = 1...31
j-k ; j,k = 1...31
i.j.k ; i-k = 1...31 MAX 5 TS
p ; p = i+32, TSi/B1-B4
r ; r = i+64, TSi/B5-B8
i-12345678 ; 1-8 = 1 or 0
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 54

By entering i (6,4,1,t,1,bt,btf,i), an individual time slot i can be defined (i


= 1...31).

By entering j-k (6,4,1,t,1,bt,btf,j-k), successive time slots j-k are seĆ


lected (j,k =1...31; j<k ).

When simultaneously defining several separate time slots, enter the time
slots in form i.j.k (6,4,1,t,1,bt,btf,i.j.k). The maximum number of time
slots i.j.k (i-k = 1...31) is five.

By means of selections p (p = i + 32) and r (r = i + 64), a 32 kbit/s branchĆ


ing is defined for time slot i (i = 1...31) halves: p; TSi bits 1-4, r; TSi bits
5-8.

By selection i-12345678, nx8 kbit/s connections can be defined by setting


bit masks for bits 1-8 (B1-B8 = 1 or 0, 1 activates the bit) of time slot i (i
= 1...31).

After the above selections, a menu is displayed of each direction related


to the bt definition. By means of this menu it is possible either to repeat
the same time slot definition or enter new time slots in the same form. An
example of the display after option 10-14 (6,4,1,t,1,bt,1,10-14):

Give TS; Dir 3:


0 Same before
j-k; j,k = 1...31

Sample entries for various types of definitions:

6,4,1,1,1,1,1-3,12-14 corresponds to definition line B1:1-3, 12-14,


i.e., branching type B1 concerning three successive time slots in table 1
between directions 1 (TS1-TS3) and 3 (TS12-TS14).

6,4,1,8,1,2,2,22-31,0,0 corresponds to definition line C2:22-31, 22-31,


22-31, i.e. in table 8 a group of ten time slots has the branching type C2.

6,4,1,5,1,4,3,2.4.8.10,11001111 corresponds to definition line D3:2.4.8.10


11001111/abcd = 1111, i.e., in table 5 the fixed data 11001111 is defined
to be sent to direction 3 in four time slots.

6,4,1,6,1,5,3,10,31 corresponds to definition line L3:10,31, i.e., in table 6


the incoming time slot 10 of direction 3 is looped back to time slot 31 in the
output of direction 3 and the incoming time slot 31 to the time slot 10 of
the output.

6,4,1,5,1,6,3,1-5,11-15,1-5,0 creates the following definition lines:


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 55

Table 5:
Dir 1 Dir 2 Dir 3
Y3: 1-5 11-15 1-5
Co1: D1 - TS1 - Bc - P0:
Co2: D2 - TS11 - Bc - P0:

In the table, a conditional branching is defined for a group of five time


slots from directions 1 and 2 to direction 3.The condition for the selection
of direction (1 or 2) is the so-called default condition, i.e., the "0"-state
of the signalling bit c in the first time slot of the group.

6,4,1,t,2 Display line n

After the selection, a menu will be displayed and the line number (1,
2...) may be entered:

Display line n:
1,2,...

6,4,1,t,3 Delete line n

C.f. the previous option.

Delete line n:
1,2,...

If a line in the middle of a table is deleted, the following line numbers will
be decreased by one.

6,4,1,t,4 Check table

By this option, the possible overlapping time slot definitions in the table
will be checked.

6,4,1,t,5 Activate table

Results in the same operation as option 6,4,2,t.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 56

6,4,1,t,6 Table name


When this option is selected, a menu will be displayed that is used for disĆ
playing, modifying or deleting the table name:

Table name:
0 Display
1 Modify
2 Delete

After option 1 (6,4,1,t,6,1) the program displays the menu for entering the
name:

Give ASCII-name:
max 15 chars

6,4,1,t,7 Table conditions

With this option, conditions can be set for the validity of alternative tables
or parts of tables.

Table conditions:
0 Display
1,2,3 Give cond. 1, 2, 3
4 Relations of cond:s
5 Priority
6 Set conditionality
7 Remove conditionality

Option 0 (6,4,1,t,7,0) displays the conditions of the table.


By options 1-3 it is possible to set three different part conditions
Co1-Co3 for the table.

Give condition:
as D-TS-B-P
D= 1-3 Rx dir
TS = 00-31 Rx TS
B= 1-8 for TS-bit
A-D for MF-bit
P= 1/0, true pol.
(or 0 = true)
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 57

When the mere direction number (D) is given, the condition will be a usĆ
able 2M signal (fault category <4) from the direction concerned. The facĆ
tory setting for the undefined part conditions is true state (TRUE). The
defined part condition is restored to true state by option 0.
By option 4 (6,4,1,t,7,4) the part conditions Co1-Co3 can be combined as
a logic AND/OR function, the true state of which enables the activation of
the table.

After option 5 (6,4,1,t,7,5) it is possible to provide a conditional table with


a priority 1-8. When a conditional table is selected into use, the branchĆ
ing table with the highest priority (1 = highest) and with its condition in
true state is activated. All branching tables provided with conditions shall
have different priorities. If the conditions of all tables defined by the user
are in untrue state, the AIS table 32 is activated.

Option 6 (6,4,1,t,7,6) activates the conditionality of a table.

Option 7 (6,4,1,t,7,7) cancels the conditionality of the table.

6,4,1,t,8 TS16 use

This option displays a menu by means of which it is possible to define


whether TS16 is used for channel-associated signalling when table t is
active.

TS16 use:
0 Display
1 MF
2 Data

Option 0 (6,4,1,t,8,0) shows the usage of TS16.

Option 1 (6,4,1,t,8,1) is made when TS16 is used for channel-associated


signalling. This is also the factory setting.

Option 2 (6,4,1,t,8,2) deactivates TS16 from channel-associated signalĆ


ling.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 58

6,4,2 Activate table

The selected table is activated into use under this option.

Activate table:
0 Display
1,...,29 EEPROM-table
32,...,39 Fixed table

Option 0 (6,4,2,0) displays the number of the active table.

Option t (6,4,2,t) accepts table t into use or, if the table t is conditional, the
selected table is the one with the highest priority and which is in true state.

6,4,3 List table

The tables defined into the storage are listed by this option. The list presĆ
ents the table number and the name that may be defined for the table.

If the table concerned is conditional, the mark after the number is a semiĆ
colon (;), otherwise a colon (:).

6,4,4 Delete table

An operator-defined table can be deleted from the storage by this opĆ


tion.

Delete table:
1,...,29 EEPROM-table
99 Delete all tables

Option t (6,4,4,t) deletes the definitions related to table t from the EEĆ
PROM storage.

Option 99 (6,4,4,99) deletes all EEPROM tables.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 59

6,4,5 Switching delay

The switching delay of conditional tables can be set in 100 ms steps under
this option. The total delay is 500 ms + the value set.

Delay N x 100 ms:


N = 1,...,200 (0 ?)

Option n (6,4,5,n) sets the switching delay of the conditional branching


tables to (500 + n x 100) ms. The default setting is n = 1, i.e., the delay is
approx. 600 ms.

Option 0 (6,4,5,0) displays the switching delay set.

6,4,6 Table copying

This option sets the number of bytes available for user-defined branchĆ
ing tables in the EEPROM memory. It defines also the number of branchĆ
ing table bytes to be copied into the new unit, when the X2 unit is reĆ
placed.

Table copying:
0 Display
1 230 (55 B copied)
2 113 (113 B copied)

Option 0 (6,4,6,0) displays the current selection (230/113).

Option 1 (6,4,6,1) reserves 230 bytes in the EEPROM memory for the
branching tables, but only 55 bytes can be copied into the new X2 unit.
The active table is copied first, and after that the other tables in the same
order in which they were stored into the memory, until the space of 55
bytes is used up. Incomplete or erroneous copying activates the Table
Fault alarm. Option 1 is the factory setting.

Option 2 (6,4,6,2) reduces the memory space available to 113 bytes, but
on the other hand it enables a complete copying of the branching tables
into the new X2 unit.

Option 2 is not allowed, if the user has defined more than 113 bytes. One
definition line of a branching table takes 4 bytes, on the average. Thus, in
most of the cases, the total space of 113 bytes is adequate.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 60

6,5 2M interfaces

Select direction 1,2, or 3

6,5,d 2M interface settings for direction d (d = 1 ,2 or 3)

2M/d settings:
0 Display
1 Set NOKIA defaults
2 Use of CRC
3 Use of TSO bits
4 Fault consequences
5 SWAIS
6 Use of 2M interf.
7 Use of MF
8 BER-6 Alarm
9 Signal of MEAS-output
10 TS16/F0 bits

6,5,d,0 Display 2M-interface settings

Option 0 (6,5,d,0) displays the setting parameters of 2M interface d.

6,5,d,1,121 Set NOKIA defaults

Option 6,5,d,1,121 sets the NOKIA defaults for interface d. The default
settings are marked with an asterisk in the menus. The listed default setĆ
tings are the following:

TS0-bits:

DB 2B, DB 2T, DB 2P DB 2B-LP, DB 2B-CD


B4: Permanent '1' B4: MCB
B5: Data channel usage B5: LCB
B6: Data channel usage B6: Permanent '1'
B7: Data channel usage B7: Data channel usage
B8: Data channel usage B8: Data channel usage
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 61

Fault consequences:

BER-3: A+S+AIS+FEA, i.e. rack alarms A and S, AIS to channels and


far-end alarm bits (FEA and MFEA)
FEA: S-alarm
AIS: S-alarm
Fault in Tx: no alarm

Others:

CRC: in use.
2M interface: in use
BER-6 alarm: not in use
Signal to MEAS output: Tx 2M data.
TS 16/F0 bits: B5, B7 and B8 permanent '1'.

6,5,d,2 Use of CRC

Option 6,5,d,2 displays a menu for CRC use:

CRC:
0 Display
1 * In use
2 Not in use

Option 0 (6,5,d,2,0) displays the CRC operating status.

Option 1 (6,5,d,2,1) takes the CRC into use.

Option 2 (6,5,d,2,2) takes the CRC out of use.

6,5,d,3 TS0 bits usage

Option 3 (6,5,d,3) displays the menu for TS0 bits usage.

TS0 bits usage:


0 Display
1 Data channel
2 *Fixed 1
3 Fixed 0
4 MCB, Master Clk. bit
5 LCB, Loop Clk. bit
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 62

The usage of each TS0 bit B4-B8 is displayed by option 0 (6,5,d,3,0).

Option 1 (6,5,d,3,1) displays the menu for data channel usage:

Data Channel:
0 Display
1 Not in use
2 Sampl. rate 4 kHz
3 *Sampl. rate 8 kHz
4 *Sample rate 16 kHz

Option 0 (6,5,d,3,1,0) displays the usage of data channel.

Option 1 (6,5,d,3,1,1) takes the data channel out of use.

By options 2-4 (6,5,d,3,1,2-4), the sampling rate for the data channel is
set. If the sampling rate is chosen to be 4 kHz, the data channel allocates
TS0/B8 for its use. In the case of 8 kHz, bits B7&B8 will be allocated (deĆ
fault setting for DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD equipment) and when the
sampling rate is 16 kHz, bits B5-B8 (default setting for DB 2B, DB 2T
and DB 2P equipment) are allocated for the data channel.

After options 2-5 (6,5,d,3,2-5) the target bit is selected:

Select bit:
4...8

Option 2,b (6,5,d,3,2,b) is used for selecting '1' as the permanent state of
bit Bb (b = 4...8) at the 2M interface, if the bit b has not already been alloĆ
cated for data cannel usage.

Option 3,b (6,5,d,3,3,b) is used for selecting '0' as the permanent state of
bit b if the bit b has not already been allocated for data channel usage.

By option 4,b (6,5,d,3,4,b), bit Bb (b=4...8) is selected as the control bit


MCB of the loop network (only in program versions LP and CD). A condiĆ
tion for the selection is that the bit concerned has not already been alloĆ
cated for data channel usage. The default setting is B4.

By option 5,b (6,5,d,3,5,b), bit Bb (b=4...8) is selected as the control bit


LCB of the loop network (only in program versions LP and CD). A condiĆ
tion for the selection is that the bit concerned has not already been alloĆ
cated for data channel usage. The default setting is B5.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 63

6,5,d,4 Fault consequences (BER-3, FEA, AIS, Fault in Tx)

Option 4 (6,5,d,4) displays four alternatives as fault consequences:

Fault consequences:
1 Error rate >1E-3
2 Far-end alarm
3 AIS alarm
4 Fault in Tx

6,5,d,4,1 Error rate > 1E-3

Option 1 (6,5,d,4,1) displays the alternative consequences of the BER-3


alarm:

Error rate > 1E-3


0 Display
1 *A+S+AIS+FEA
2 A alarm
3 B alarm
4 No alarm

Option 0 (6,5,d,4,1,0) displays the consequences defined for the BER-3


fault.

Option 1 (6,5,d,4,1,1) (default setting) causes alarms A and S to be given


as an error rate alarm. The AIS is connected to channels to indicate the
detected fault situation. In addition, alarms (B3 and B6) are sent to the far
end.

When option 2 (6,5,d,4,1,2) is active, the BER-3 fault activates alarm A


but the received signal still goes to the channels. This option is applicable
when a very bad transmission path is to be utilized; the facility aims at preĆ
venting the lengthening of breaks in the multiplex equipment.

Option 3 (6,5,d,4,1,3) differs from the previous one in that the fault only
activates alarm B.

When option 4 (6,5,d,4,1,4) has been selected, an error rate 1E-3 causes
no corollary alarms. The error rate alarm is not displayed even on the
equipment fault display.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 64

6,5,d,4,2 Far-end alarm consequences

FEA consequences:
0 Display
1 *S alarm
2 B+S alarm
3 A+S alarm

Option 0 (6,5,d,4,2,0) displays the far-end alarm consequences (FEA)


caused by alarm bit TS0/B3 of the far-end equipment.

With option 1 (6,5,d,4,2,1) a default setting is made. With the default setĆ
ting in use, the alarm received from the far end causes alarm S, which
means that the services of the equipment are not available due to a fault
detected in the far end.

Option 2 (6,5,d,4,2,2) causes that, in addition to alarm S, alarm B is given


as a result of a far-end alarm.

Option 3 (6,5,d,4,2,3) causes that, in addition to alarm S, alarm A is given


as a result of a far-end alarm. The option is used when the far-end staĆ
tion is not monitored, the monitoring being done via the near end.

6,5,d,4,3 AIS alarm consequences

AIS-alarm consequences:
0 Display
1 *S alarm
2 B+S alarm

Option 0 (6,5,d,4,3,0) displays the fault consequence set for the AIS sigĆ
nal.

With option 1 (6,5,d,4,3,1) a default setting is made, in which case an


identified AIS signal causes alarm S; the fault has already been detected
somewhere else.

With option 2 (6,5,d,4,3,2) the alarm classification is changed from norĆ


mal so that alarms S and B are caused by the AIS.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 65

6,5,d,4,4 Fault in Tx

The consequences for a situation where all signalling bits of one of the
channels 1-15 in the Tx direction d are zeros (abcd = 0000) are defined
here.

Fault in Tx:
0 Display
1 B-alarm
2*No alarm
3 Not used

Option 0 (6,5,d,4,4,0) displays the active selection.

When option 1 (6,5,d,4,4,1) has been selected, the Tx channel signalling


0000 is replaced by 0001 and a B-alarm is activated.

When option 2 (6,5,d,4,4,2) has been selected, the signalling of the chanĆ
nel is replaced by 0001 but no alarm is generated.

When option 3 (6,5,d,4,4,3) is active, signalling 0000 is enabled on chanĆ


nels 1-15.

6,5,d,5 SWAIS

The option halts the signalling when the Rx signal is faulty.

SWAIS:
0 Display
1 * Enabled
2 Disabled

Option 0 (6,5,d,5,0) displays the active selection.

When option 1 (6,5,d,5,1) is active, the signalling of the through-going


channels is not replaced immediately by the AIS when faults of short durĆ
ation in the Rx signal (e.g. breaks) occur. The state preceding the break is
retained for approx. 200 ms.

When option 2 (6,5,d,5,2) is active, the Rx signal faults that require the
signalling to be replaced by the AIS are seen immediately at the channel
outputs.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 66

6,5,d,6 Use of 2M

The option defines whether the 2M interface is in use or not (=sends the
AIS to the interface and channels).

Use of 2M:
0 Display
1 * Used
2 Not used

Option 0 (6,5,d,6,0) displays the use of 2M interface.


Option 1 (6,5,d,6,1) sets the 2M interface into use (e.g. under fault moniĆ
toring).
Option 2 (6,5,d,6,2) removes the 2M interface out of use. At the same
time, the AIS signal is connected to the channels and 2M AIS towards the
interface, and the fault monitoring concerning the interface is ended.
NOTE! When channel units are used, the 2M interface of
direction 3 must be taken out of use.

6,5,d,7 Use of multiframe


The option displays whether the multiframe is used in the active branchĆ
ing table.

6,5,d,8 BER-6 Alarm

Under this option, the monitoring of BER-6 alarm is set on/off and the
count time of the alarm is set.

BER-6 Alarm:
0 Display
1-254 sec. count time
255 *disable alarm

Option 0 (6,5,d,8,0) displays the setting parameters of the BER-6 alarm.


A selection in the range 1-254 (6,5,d,8,1-254) sets the count time of
BER-6 fault if CRC is used. If CRC is not used, a message concerning it is
displayed, and the setting is not allowed.
Option 255 (6,5,d,8,255) disables the BER-6 alarm.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 67

6,5,d,9 MEAS output signal


Under this option, the signal to the MEAS output is selected from the 2M
interface.

MEAS.-output:
0 Display
1 *Tx 2M data
2 Rx 2M data
3 Tx 2M CLK
4 Rx 2M CLK

Option 0 (6,5,d,9,0) displays the signal selected to the MEAS output.


Option 1 (6,5,d,9,1) selects the Tx direction data signal.
Option 2 (6,5,d,9,2) selects the Rx direction data signal.
Option 3 (6,5,d,9,3) selects the 2048 kHz clock signal used in the Tx direcĆ
tion.
Option 4 (6,5,d,9,4) selects the 2048 kHz clock signal regenerated from
the Rx direction, except when the incoming 2M is missing, in which case
the clock signal will be that of the transmitter.

6,5,d,10 TS16/F0 bits usage


This option displays the following menu:

MF/F0 bits:
0 Display
1 *Fixed 1
2 Fixed 0

Option 0 (6,5,d,10,0) displays the setting of bits 5, 7 and 8 of TS16/F0.


Option 1 (6,5,d,10,1) can be used to set a TS16/F0 bit to be given at a later
stage into permanent "1" state.
Option 2 (6,5,d,10,2) sets a bit into "0" state.
Options 1 and 2 display the menu below defining the TS16/F0 bit(s) the
selected permanent state is set for:

Select bit:
5, 7 or 8
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 68

6,6 Default settings

When the option is selected, the program displays a menu prompting for
confirmation:

Are you sure?


121 Yes

Option 121 activates the following default settings:

DB 2B:
By Set NOKIA defaults, the DB 2 equipment is set to operate as a typical
branching equipment which consists of a B2 unit and a X2 unit. The B2
unit is in location 1 in the cartridge, and the X2 unit in location 2. The deĆ
fault settings are:
1. Master timing is generated from direction 1 clock.

2. Master clock is connected to synchronization output.

3. Main branch is buffered.

4. CRC is in use.

5. Error ratio >1E-3 generates alarm AS and transmission of AIS to


channels.

6. Far-end alarm generates alarm S.

7. Received 2M AIS generates alarm S.

8. Fault in Tx alarm not in use.

9. 2M interfaces (1-3) are in use.

10. Data channel sampling rate 16 kHz.

11. Interface 1 output signal is connected to the B2 unit MEAS output


(Tx1 2M Data).

12. Interface 3 output signal is connected to the X2 unit MEAS output


(Tx3 2M Data).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 69

DB 2B-LP and DB 2B-CD:


The default settings set the equipment to act as a slave station of the loop
network. The following list presents the differences as compared to the
DB 2B:

1. The master timing is generated as determined by network control


bits MCB and LCB.

3. The main branch is unbuffered.

10. The sampling rate of the data channel is 8 kHz.

13. In interfaces 1 and 2 the following TS0 bits have been defined as the
loop network control bits: MCB = B4 and LCB = B5.

DB 2T:

Differences and additions as compared to the DB 2B:

14. Multiframe in use.

15. Interfaces 1 and 2 are of equal priority.

DB 2P:

In the DB 2P there are two pieces of DB 2 equipment (I and II) side by


side, and the settings are directed to both pieces of equipment simultaĆ
neously.

The differences of default settings as compared to the DB 2B:

15. Interfaces I and II are of equal priority.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 70

6,7 Switching settings (program version T)


These settings define the delay before switching the input interface in a
fault situation. The priorities for interfaces in situations where both sigĆ
nals coming to the interfaces are usable are also selected here.

Switching settings:
0 Display
1 Set defaults
2 Change delay
3 Priority

Option 0 (6,7,0) displays the switching delay of the equipment and the
priority status.
Option 1 (6,7,1) sets the interface priorities to equal.
When option 2 (6,7,2) is selected, the following menu is displayed:

Change delay nx50 ms:


n:1...40
0 Display

Any selection in the allowed range sets the switching delay (default setĆ
ting 50 ms), and option 0 displays it.
When option 3 (6,7,3) is selected, the following menu is displayed:

Priority:
0 Display
1 *Equal
2 IF 1 higher
3 IF 2 higher

Option 0 (6,7,3,0) displays the priority status.


Option 1 (6,7,3,1) sets the priorities of the interfaces to equal. The switchĆ
ing takes place only if the quality of the selected incoming signal is worse.

Option 2 (6,7,3,2) sets the priority of interface 1 higher. The signal from
input interface 1 is selected always when its quality is as good or better
than that of interface 2 input signal.

Option 3 (6,7,3,3) sets the priority of interface 2 higher.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 71

6,7 Switching settings (program version P)

These settings define the delay before switching the input interface in a
fault situation. The priorities for interfaces in situations where both sigĆ
nals coming to the equipment are usable are also selected here.

Switching settings:
0 Display
1 Set defaults
2 Change delay
3 Priority

Option 0 (6,7,0) displays the switching delay and the priority status of the
equipment.
Option 1 (6,7,1) sets the priorities of the equipment to equal.
When option 2 (6,7,2) is selected, the following menu is displayed:

Change delay nx50 ms:


n:1...40
0 Display

Any selection in the allowed range sets the switching delay (default setĆ
ting 50 ms), and option 0 displays it.
When option 3 (6,7,3) is selected, the following menu is displayed:

Priority:
0 Display
1 *Equal
2 IIF I higher
3 IF II higher
4 Equal, 1 -> DB 2T
5 Equal, 2 -> DB 2T
6 Equal 1&2 -> DB 2T

Option 0 (6,7,3,0) displays the priority status.

Option 1 (6,7,3,1) sets the priorities of the equipment halves equal. The
switching takes place only if the quality of the Rx signal from the selected
equipment half is worse.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 72

Option 2 (6,7,3,2) sets the priority of equipment I higher. The Rx signal of


equipment I is selected always when its quality is as good or better than
that of the Rx signal of equipment II.

Option 3 (6,7,3,3) sets the priority of equipment II higher.

Option 4 (6,7,3,4) is used when there is a DB 2T equipment in the direcĆ


tion of equipment interface 1.

Option 5 (6,7,3,5) is used when there is a DB 2T equipment in the direcĆ


tion of equipment interface 2.

Option 6 (6,7,3,6) is used when there is a DB 2T equipment in the direcĆ


tion of equipment interface 1 and equipment interface 2.

6,8 Read/Save B2 settings

Read/Save:
0 Display ID
1 Read settings
2,<data> Save settings

Option 0 (6,8,0) displays the unit ID in decimals. The units concerned


must have identical IDs.
By option 1 (6,8,1), settings of the B2 unit are read to the Service Terminal
or Service Terminal Emulator data buffer (numbers appear on the disĆ
play).
By option 2,* (6,8,2,*), (B2 settings as the contents of the data buffer) the
B2 unit settings included in the buffer are saved into the unit concerned.

In short, copying from one unit to another is performed by reading the setĆ
tings from unit A by option 1, after which connection to the equipment B
is established, and option 2,* (*= DATA key) or TOP 6,8,2,* is selected.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 73

6,9 Unit settings

Under this option, the object for the setting can be selected to be the X2
unit of the DB equipment or one of the channel units that may be included
in the equipment configuration.
By option 9 (6,9), the menu for unit option is obtained from the main
menu of settings:

Select unit:
2 X2
3... uP units

When unit settings are made, the target unit is selected and as a response,
the menu on the settings of that unit is obtained.

6,9,2 X2-settings

X2-settings:
0 Display
6 NOKIA defaults
7 Timeout for controls
8 Read/Save

With option 6 (6,9,2,6), the default settings can be set to the X2 unit.

With option 7 (6,9,2,7), the time-out for controls can be set.

With option 8 (6,9,2,8), the X2 unit settings can be read and saved.

6,9,2,6 NOKIA defaults

When the option is selected, the program displays a menu for confirmaĆ
tion:

Are you sure?


121 Yes

Option 121 (6,9,2,6,121) activates the default settings of the X2 unit


(MUX settings and 2M3).
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 74

6,9,2,7 Timeout for controls

Under this option, a time is selected for the controls to remain in effect.
Default setting is 10 min.

Timeout for controls:


0 Display
1...65000 min.

Option 0 (6,9,2,7,0) displays the time-out selected for the controls of the
X2 unit. Other options within the allowable range set the time-out (minĆ
utes).

6,9,2,8 Read/save settings

Read/Save:
0 Display ID
1 Read settings
2,<data> Save settings

The effects of the options are the same as under menu branch 6,8, but the
target is now the X2 unit.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 75

4.7 Measurements

Measurements:
1 Supply voltages
9 Unit measurements

7,1 Voltage measurements

Voltage measurements:
1 Supply voltage +5 V
2 Supply voltage -5 V

When the option has been selected, it is possible to read the value of the
supply voltage in question and to calibrate the measurement system to the
value measured. Sample display following option 1 (7,1,1):

Supply voltage +5 V:
1 Display voltage (float)
2 Calibration

Option 1 displays the supply voltage measured by the equipment.

When option 2m is selected, the measured supply voltage (mV) can be


entered.

7,9 Unit measurements

By option (7,9), a menu for unit selection is obtained:

Select unit:
2 X2
3... uP-units

As a response to the unit selection, the menu on measurements, offered


by the unit in question, is obtained.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 76

7,9,2 X2 measurements

X2 measurements:
1 Supply voltages

The functions under this option are the same as those under option 7,1
but the object is now the X2 unit.

4.8 Statistics
This item includes statistics and error counters maintained by the equipĆ
ment itself.

Statistics:
1 2M signal quality
2 2M error counters
3 CPU counters
9 Unit statistics

8,1 2M signal quality


With this option, the input interfaces of the DB 2 equipment are selected
as the object. The equipment displays:

Select direction:
1 or 2

Options 1 and 2 are directed to corresponding input interfaces 1 and 2 on


the B2 unit. After the direction has been selected, the following is disĆ
played:

2M signal quality:
1 Reset statistics
2 TT, AT, ES, SES, DM
3 Total time
4 Available time
5 Err. secs.
6 Severely err. secs.
7 Degraded minutes
8 S (unav) /S (tot)
9 S (err) / S (ava)
10 S (sev) / S (ava)
11 M (degr) / M (ava)
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 77

Option 1 (8,1,d,1) resets the counters and starts the counting again.
Option 2 (8,1,d,2) is an NMS response showing the floating point paraĆ
meter values of the statistics counters. These parameters can be used
when computing statistics with the Network Management System (NMS).
The given values are: total time, availability time, errored seconds, seĆ
verely errored seconds and degraded minutes.
Options 3...7 show a floating point value of the parameter given by the
statistics counter in question.

Options 8...11 display four ratios computed on the contents of the above
statistic counters.

8,2 2M error counters

When this option is selected, the number of the direction whose error
counters are to be examined is given:

Select direction:
1, 2 or 3

When the direction has been selected (8,2,d), the following is displayed:

2M error counters:
0 Display all
2 Frame sync. losts
3 Errored framewords
4 Errored CRC-blocks
5 Reset counters

Option 0 (8,2,d,0) displays the readings of all three counters simultaĆ


neously.

Option 2 (8,2,d,2) indicates the number of frame alignment losses since


the previous counter reset.
Option 3 (8,2,d,3) indicates the number of frame alignment words deĆ
tected to be erroneous.
Option 4 (8,2,d,4) indicates the number of detected CRC block errors
since the previous counter reset. If only few errors appear on the transĆ
mission path, the number of CRC block errors is approximately the same
as the number of bit errors.
Option 5 (8,2,d,5) resets the error counters.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 78

8,3 CPU Reset counter

CPU reset counter:


0 Display
1 Reset

Option 0 displays the number of CPU resets in the B2 unit since the previĆ
ous reset of the counter.
Option 1 resets the counter.

8,9 Unit statistics


Option (8,9) displays a menu for unit selection:

Select unit:
2 X2
3... uP-units

When the unit has been selected, the menu on the statistics of that unit is
displayed.

8,9,2 X2 statistics

When this option is selected, the following menu is displayed:

X2 statistics:
3 CPU reset counter

8,9,2,3 CPU Reset counter

CPU reset counter:


0 Display
1 Reset

Option 0 displays the number of CPU resets in the X2 unit since the previĆ
ous reset of the counter.

Option 1 resets the counter.


2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 79

4.9 Testing

Testing:
4 A/D-test
5 Memory test
6 Memory operations
7 RUNTEST
9 Unit testing

9,4 A/D-test

Option 4 (9,4) starts testing the A/D converter of the B2 unit processor.
The response obtained is one of the displays given below. The lower one
indicates a detected fault.

A/D OK

A/D #OK

9,5 Memory test

Memory test:
1 RAM
2 EPROM

Option 1 (9,5,1) tests the RAM memory circuits in the processor environĆ
ment of the B2 unit. The lower one of the response alternatives indicates
that a failure has been detected:

RAM OK

RAM #OK

Option 2 (9,5,2) starts testing the EPROM program memory of the B2


unit. The response obtained is a text indicating the duration of the test (10
s). During the test, the yellow service LED is lit and the A- and S-
alarms are active. The result is obtained by starting the test again.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 80

EPROM OK

EPROM #OK

9,6 Memory operations


Note! The menus for the memory operations have been removed from the
program starting from program version 06A. After each option, the proĆ
gram responds by displaying the text: "See User Manual".

Memory operations:
1 Read byte
2 Write byte in RAM
3 Read 8 bytes
4 Write byte in EEPROM

By option 1 (9,6,1) the text prompting for the read address is obtained:

Give memory address:


0...65535

When data is to be written into some memory location, option 2 (9,6,2) is


selected, after which the text prompting for the memory address is obĆ
tained:

Give memory address:


0...65535

When the memory address has been entered, the text prompting for the
write data is obtained:

Give byte value:


0...255
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 81

When several bytes are to be read simultaneously, option 3 (9,6,3) is seĆ


lected, after which the text prompting for the address of the first byte is
obtained:

Give memory address:


0...65535

When data is to be written into an EEPROM memory location, option 4


(9,6,4) is selected:

Give EEPROM offset:


0...511

After the address has been entered, the text prompting for data is obĆ
tained:

Give byte value:


0...255

9,6,99,1 Reset B2 unit

The option resets the B2 unit.

9,6,99,59 Initialize DB 2

The selection is made at the factory in the beginning of testing and always
when the program of the equipment is replaced by a program of another
equipment type. The option resets the EEPROM memories of the equipĆ
ment (e.g. branching tables) and loads settings corresponding with deĆ
fault and factory settings from the EPROM memory. When this option is
selected, the program also performs the equipment installation (6,2,3)
and resets the B2 unit (9,6,99,1).

9,7 RUNTEST

By selecting the RUNTEST, more detailed information is obtained on the


cause of the "run diagnostic test" alarm appearing on the fault display.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 82

9,9 Unit testing

The option displays the text for unit selection:

Select unit:
2 X2
3... uP-units

After the unit has been selected, the program displays the menu on the
tests for the unit in question.

9,9,2 X2-testing

X2 Testing:
4 A/D test
5 Memory test
6 Memory operations
7 RUNTEST

9,9,2,4 A/D test

By this option, the program performs the same actions as by option 9,4,
but the object is now the X2 unit.

9,9,2,5 X2 Memory tests

By this option, the program performs the same actions as by option 9,5,
but the object is now the X2 unit.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 83

9,9,2,6 Memory operations

The menus for the memory operations have been removed starting from
program version 06A. Refer to option 9,6.

Memory operations:
1 Read byte
2 Write byte in RAM
3 Read 8 bytes
4 Write byte in EEPROM

Operations following options 1-4 are the same as those under option 9,6.

9,9,2,6,99,1 Reset X2 unit

The option resets the X2 unit.

9,9,2,6,99,59 Initialize X2 unit

The option resets the EEPROM memory of the X2 unit (e.g. branching
tables) and loads settings corresponding with default and factory settings
from the EPROM memory. When this option is selected, the program
also resets the X2 unit (9,9,2,6,99,1).

9,9,2,7 RUNTEST

By selecting the RUNTEST, more detailed information is obtained on the


cause of the "run diagnostic test" alarm appearing on the fault display.
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 84

4.10 User privileges

This item includes the data protection functions of the equipment. If the
response Missing rights is obtained when the protected functions are
used, the password must be known or local pin grounding (PIN) must be
used to obtain the privileges.
Protected functions include all changes made on settings and identificaĆ
tions and operations related with traffic or alarms in general.

User privileges:
1 Password for privileges
2 PIN for privileges
3 Cancel privileges
4 Setting parameters

By option 1 (10,1) the text prompting for the password is obtained:

Give password:
1...7 char

By entering the correct password, the protections are cancelled for the
time defined in the time parameters (10,4) assuming that the "password
for privileges" (10,4,3,2) has been selected as the protection.
By option 2 (10,2), the following is obtained:

Ground local PIN

By grounding the pin c1 on the service connector (B2), privileges are obĆ
tained until the time defined by the parameter has elapsed from disconĆ
necting the grounding.
This method can always be used although the password were in use.
By option 3 (10,3) the privileges are cancelled. If not cancelled, the priviĆ
leges are valid during the whole time monitoring period once they have
been given.
By option 4 (10,4) the menu for protection parameters is obtained:

Setting parameters:
1 Timeout
2 Protections
3 Password
2 Mbit/s BRANCHING EQUIPMENT DB 2
Operation with Service Terminal
II/4
6.3.1992 Page 85

Privileges obtained by password or by PIN signal are valid during the time
monitoring period set. By selecting 1 (10,4,1) the text for setting the
time-out is obtained:

Timeout:
0 Display
1...1000 min.

Note! Set the password before activating the protections.

The protective state of the equipment can be set in advance. By option 2


(10,4,2) the menu for setting the protective state is obtained:

Protections:
0 Display
1 No protection
2 Password required
3 Local PIN required

Option 1 (10,4,2,1) cancels the protections, in which case e.g. controls and
settings can be performed without the password or PIN signal (factory setĆ
ting).

When option 2 (10,4,2,2) has been selected, the password must be known
or the PIN signal must be grounded if the protected functions are to be
used the next time the equipment is used. The selection presupposes that
a password has been given to the equipment.

When option 3 (10,4,2,3) has been selected, the protected functions can
only be accessed by connecting pin PIN to ground.

The password is given by selecting 3 (10,4,3) in the Setting parameters


menu, in which case the text for setting the password is obtained:

Give password:
1...7 char

The password cannot be given after the protections have been taken into
use. Therefore, the password has to be given before the protections are
activated.

Вам также может понравиться